Vicruns VD520 Manual

Preface
Thank you for purchasing VD520 Series Inverters!

VD520 is a high-performance vector control inverter developed by VicRuns. Adopting advanced
vector control algorithm, it is widely used for asynchronous motor speed control. Through its
integrated EMC design and with optimized PWM control technique to meet users’ demand on
environmental requirement such as low-noise in application places and low EMI. It has perfect
anti-tripping control and good adaptive ability to bad power grid, temperature, humidity and dust, in
order to satisfy various sophisticated requirement under high precision drive applications, thus to
satisfy users expectation of higher reliability and stronger adaptability to environment of their
equipment, achieving industry specialization and personalized motor drive and control system
solution.
VD520 series high performance vector control inverter has following outstanding features:
1. Various control method
Supporting control method: SVC, V/F control.
2. Leading vector control algorithm
Optimized sensorless vector control has better low speed stability, stronger low frequency load
capacity, supporting speed control and torque control.
3. Support multi-function I/O extension and multi-function MFI extension port
Multi-function I/O extension card, multi-function MFI extension port can connect related extension
function unit defined by manufacturer.
This manual provides the related issues: user installing and site wiring, quick debug, parameters
setting, failure diagnose and eliminate and daily maintenance and correlation matters. Please read
this manual to make sure you can install, use and maintain the inverter correctly, then play their
superior performance.
Please send this manual to the user or maintainer of this inverter, and properly kept.
Unpacking and Inspection:
Every inverter has been inspected rigorously before shipping.
Please confirm carefully when unpacking the packing carton:
● Check if any damage signs of the product and its package.
● Check if the model and inverter rated values on the nameplate are the same as stated on your order
and user manual.
● The box contains the inverter, manufacturer certificate, user manual.
If the product is damaged during transportation, or there is any omission or damage, please contact
our company or your local supplier immediately.
First time use suggests:
The users who use this product for the first time shall read this manual carefully. For any doubt on
certain functions and performances, please contact the technical support personnel of our company
for help, so as to use this product properly. With commitment to the constant improvement of the
inverter products, our company may change the information provided without additional notice.
VD520 series inverter is confirmed to below international standard, has passed the CE certification.
IEC/EN 61800-5-1: 2003 adjustable speed electric drive system safety regulation requirements;
IEC/EN 61800-3: 2004 adjustable speed electric drive system: part 3: product EMC standard and its
specific test method;
IEC/EN61000-2-1, 2-2, 3-2, 3-3, 4-2, 4-3, 4-4, 4-5, 4-6; EMC international and EU standard .
Contents
Chapter 1 Safety and Precautions............................................................................................................ - 1 -
1.1 Safety Definition ................................................................................................................................... - 1 -
1.2 Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................................... - 1 -
1.3 General Precautions ............................................................................................................................ - 3 -
Chapter 2 Product Information .................................................................................................................. - 6 -
2.1 Designation Rules ................................................................................................................................ - 6 -
2.2 Nameplate............................................................................................................................................. - 6 -
2.3 Inverter Series ...................................................................................................................................... - 6 -
2.4 Product Specifications ......................................................................................................................... - 8 -
2.5 Physical Appearance and Main Structure Diagram........................................................................ - 10 -
2.6 Product Appearance and Installation Dimension............................................................................ - 11 -
2.7 Physical Dimensions of External Keyboard .................................................................................... - 13 -
2.8 Braking Unit Model Selection Guide ................................................................................................ - 14 -
2.9 Routine Repair and Maintenance of Inverter .................................................................................. - 16 -
2.10 Warranty Introduction ...................................................................................................................... - 17 -
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation .................................................................................. - 18 -
3.1 Installation Environment .................................................................................................................... - 18 -
3.2 The Installation Direction and Space ............................................................................................... - 18 -
3.3 Removing and Mounting the Cover Plate and Keyboard .............................................................. - 19 -
3.4 Inverter and External Electrical Parts Connection.......................................................................... - 20 -
3.5 Standard Wiring Diagram .................................................................................................................. - 25 -
3.6 Main Circuit Terminals ....................................................................................................................... - 27 -
3.7 Control Circuit Terminal ..................................................................................................................... - 30 -
Chapter 4 Operation and Display ........................................................................................................... - 38 -
4.1 Introduction to Operation and Display Interface ............................................................................. - 38 -
4.2 Motor Parameter Self-learning.......................................................................................................... - 40 -
4.3 Password Setting ............................................................................................................................... - 41 -
4.4 Parameter Lock (authority lower than password)........................................................................... - 41 -
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table ..................................................................................................... - 42 -
Chapter 6 Parameter Description ........................................................................................................... - 96 -
F0 Basic Function ..................................................................................................................................... - 96 -
F1 Start/Stop Control Group .................................................................................................................. - 104 -
F2 Motor 1 Parameter .............................................................................................................................- 111 -
F3 Motor 1 Vector Control Parameter .................................................................................................. - 113 -
F4 Motor 1 V/F Control Parameter ....................................................................................................... - 116 -
F5 Input Terminal Group ........................................................................................................................ - 120 -
F6 Output Terminal Function Group ..................................................................................................... - 130 -
F7 Keyboard and Display Function Group .......................................................................................... - 136 -
F8 Protection Parameters...................................................................................................................... - 140 -
F9 Fault Record and Setting Parameter Group .................................................................................. - 143 -
FA Process PID Parameter Group........................................................................................................ - 147 -
Fb Enhance Function Group ................................................................................................................. - 152 -
Fd MODBUS Communication Parameter Group ................................................................................ - 168 -
FF User Parameters Group ................................................................................................................... - 169 -
FP Factory Parameter Group ................................................................................................................ - 171 -
A0 Motor 1 Torque Control Parameter Group ..................................................................................... - 172 -
AI Optimize Control Parameter Group ................................................................................................. - 175 -
A2, 3, 4 Motor 2 Parameter Function Group ....................................................................................... - 177 -
b0 User Customize Function Code....................................................................................................... - 178 -
b1 Virtual IO Parameter Group ............................................................................................................. - 179 -
b2 AI Curve Setting Parameter Group ................................................................................................. - 183 -
b3 AIAO Correction Parameter Group ................................................................................................. - 185 -
U0 Basic Monitoring Parameters Group .............................................................................................. - 187 -
Chapter 7 EMC Guide............................................................................................................................ - 189 -
7.1 Definition............................................................................................................................................ - 189 -
7.2 EMC Standard Introduction............................................................................................................. - 189 -
7.3 EMC Guide........................................................................................................................................ - 189 -
Chapter 8 Fault Shooting and Solutions .............................................................................................. - 191 -
8.1 Fault Alarm and Countermeasures ................................................................................................ - 191 -
8.2 Common Faults and Solutions........................................................................................................ - 195 -
Chapter 9 Communication Protocol...................................................................................................... - 196 -
9.1 About Protocol .................................................................................................................................. - 196 -
9.2 Application Methods......................................................................................................................... - 196 -
9.3 Bus Structure .................................................................................................................................... - 196 -
9.4 Protocol Description......................................................................................................................... - 196 -
9.5 Communication Frame Structure.................................................................................................... - 196 -
9.6 Command Code and Communication Data Description.............................................................. - 197 -
Fd MODBUS Communication ............................................................................................................... - 205 -
VD520 Series Inverter User Manual Safety and Precautions
Chapter 1 Safety and Precautions

1.1 Safety Definition
During the installation, commissioning and maintenance of the system, please make sure to follow
the safety and precautions of this chapter. In case of a result of illegal operations, caused any harm
and losses is nothing to do with the manufacturer. In this manual, safety precautions are divided to
two types below:
● Danger arising due to improper operations may cause severe hurt or even death and major
property damage.
● Danger arising due to improper operations may cause moderate damage or light hurt, and
equipment damage or property damage.
1.2 Safety Precautions

1.2.1 Before Installation
● Do not install the equipment if you find water seepage, component missing or damage upon
unpacking.
● Do not install the equipment if the packing list does not conform to the product you received
● Handle the equipment with care during transportation to prevent damage.

● Do not touch the components with your hands. Failure to comply will result in static electricity
damage.
1.2.2 During Installation
● Install the equipment on incombustible objects such as metal, and keep it away from combustible
materials. Failure to comply may result in a fire.
● Install the equipment according to regulations and tighten the fastening bolts. Failure to comply
may result in equipment falling.
● Do not loosen the fixed screws of the components, especially the screws with red mark.
● Do not drop conductive objects as wire ends or screw into inverter. Failure to comply will result in
damages.
● Install inverter in place avoid to vibration, water drops and direct sunlight.
-1-
Safety and Precautions VD520 Series Inverter User Manual
● When two inverters are installed in the same cabinet, arrange the installation positions properly to
ensure normal cooling effect, keep the cabinet with good ventilation.
1.2.3 At Wiring
● Wiring must be performed only by qualified personnel under instructions described in this manual.
Failure to comply may result in unexpected accidents.
● A circuit breaker must be used to isolate the power supply and inverter. Failure to comply may
result in a fire.
● Ensure that the power supply is cut off before wiring. Failure to comply may result in electric
shock.
● Connect inverter to ground properly by standard. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
● Do not connect the input power with output terminals U, V, W, confirm the mark on terminal before
connection to avoid wrong wiring. Failure to comply can damage the inverter!
● Never connect the braking resistor between the DC bus terminals P+ and P-. Failure to comply
may result in a fire.
● The wire size of main circuit should conformed to standard, the wiring should comply with EMC
and local safety standard. Failure to comply may result in accidents.
● Use shielded cable for input output control circuit of analog and rapid speed pulse signal, and
ensure the shielding layer is reliably grounded.
1.2.4 Before Power-on:
● Check that the following requirements are met:

● The voltage class of the power supply is consistent with the rated voltage class of the AC drive.
● The input terminals (R, S, T) and output terminals (U, V, W) are properly connected.
● No short-circuit exists in the peripheral circuit.
● The wiring is secured.
● The external units of inverter and wires are configured under the manual instructed, all matched
circuit and wiring are correctly connected.
● Failure to comply will result in damage to inverter!
1.2.5 After Power-on
● Do not open the cover after inverter power-on to prevent electric shock.
● Do not touch or operate the inverter with wet hands. Failure to comply will result in electric shock.
● Do not touch any terminal of inverter after power-on, or drag connection cable. Failure to comply
will result in equipment damage or electric shock.
● Do not try to check or change the manufacturer parameter. Failure to comply may result in
malfunction or damage to inverter!
● Make sure the mechanical equipment is ready to start before inverter run with loading, make sure
related staff is in safety zone. Failure to comply will result in damage or personal hurt!
● Please pay attention to hiding accident which may result in personal hurt or property damage
while motor is run, if it is necessary to identify the motor parameter.
-2-
1.2.6 During Operation
● Do not touch the cooling fan or braking resistor etc, otherwise may cause personal injury!
● Do not do inspection while inverter run, except for professional technician, otherwise may cause
inverter damaged or personal injury.
● Do not move inverter or the installed cabinet while it is run, keep external objects falling into the
device. Failure to comply will result in damage.
● Start/Stop inverter via terminal function or other control method, try not to start inverter via directly
power-on control method. Do not use contactor on inverter output terminal to control motor starting
or stop.
1.2.7 During Maintenance
● Do not repair and maintain the equipment if power is connected. Otherwise there will be danger of
electric shock!
● If the LED is still on light on control panel, it is Disabled to disassemble the body in order to avoid
electric shock.
●The inverter shall be repaired and maintained only by the qualified person who has received
professional training. Otherwise, it may cause personal injury or equipment damage.
● For all the standard equipped or optional accessories, must be dismounted or mounted while the
inverter power is disconnected.
1.3 General Precautions

1.3.1 Motor Insulation Inspection
For first time usage, motor is left unused for long time or periodically inspected, insulation inspection
must be done to avoid motor coils insulation failure which may result in inverter damage. Disconnect
motor and inverter before inspection, 500V voltage type Meg-ohmmeter is recommended. It is up to
standard if insulation resist value no less than 5MΩ.
1.3.2 Motor Overheat Protection
If selected motor and inverter rated capacity doesn’t match, especially the inverter rated power larger
than motor rated power, it is necessary to adjust the motor protect parameter of inverter into actual
used motor parameter. Or a thermal relay can be installed to motor to protect motor.
1.3.3 Run with Power Frequency (under or above)
This inverter can provide 0.00Hz~650.00Hz output frequency, so motor is run at low frequency on
long time. Take care of motor cooling or frequency converted motor could be a choice. When motor
run with over-limit rate frequency, consider the bearing capacity of mechanic system with high speed,
to avoid the shortening of lifespan of equipment.
1.3.4 Vibration and Resonance of Mechanic System
Since inherent property of mechanic system, inverter could have mechanic system resonance point
while accelerating or decelerating, by setting inverter jump frequency can avoid mechanic system
resonance point. If customer required run frequency is happened to be the same with mechanic
resonance frequency, it is necessary to change run frequency or change the inherent resonance
frequency of mechanic system.
-3-
Safety and Precautions VD520 Series Inverter User Manual
1.3.5 Regarding Motor Heating and Noise

Inverter output voltage is PWM wave, with some higher harmonic, so motor temperature rising, noise
and vibration should increase a little comparing with power frequency, which is normal.
1.3.6 Pressure Sensing Device on Output Side or Improve Power Factor Capacitor
Inverter output voltage is PWM wave, if output side installed capacitor to improve power factor or
pressure sensing device to anti-thunder, it could easily result in instant over current or damage to
inverter. Disassemble such devices before inverter installation.
1.3.7 Switchover Device as Contactor Installed on Inverter Input Output Side
If there is a contactor between power supply and inverter input terminal, it is Disabled to use it to
start/stop inverter. When it is very necessary to use the contactor to start/stop inverter, the action
interval time should not less than 1hr. Since frequent charge/discharge could easily shorten the
lifespan of electrolytic capacitor inside inverter. If there is a contactor between motor and inverter
output terminal, make sure if motor is static and inverter is without output, then switchover the
contactor, failure to comply may damage the inverter.
1.3.8 Applications with Non-rated Voltage
The application voltage range used on inverter should not exceed the regulated voltage on this
manual, low voltage or higher voltage can easily damage inverter.
If power is not Enable, then use voltage reduction or voltage rising device to deal with voltage
conversion in order to comply with inverter input voltage requirement.
1.3.9 Three-phase Input Change to Two Phase Input
If inverter is 3phase input type, do not use 2phase power supply, otherwise it could result in phase
loss protection error even inverter damage.
1.3.10 Lightening Surge Protection
Although there is lightening overvoltage overcurrent device inside inverter, which has certain
self-protection function for lightening induction. But for user located in lightening frequent zones, it is
necessary to add lightening protection unit in front of inverter, this does good to extend inverter
lifespan.
1.3.11 Altitude Level and Voltage Reduction Usage
Place with altitude exceeding 2000M, inverter cooling effect get worse due to air condense reduced,
so under-rated usage of inverter is necessary.
1.3.12 Common DC Bus Introduction
In condition of several units of inverter run at the same time, then common DC bus can be adopted to
save electricity. This type of inverter support common DC bus, but make sure the power specification
of those inverters are very close in advance, otherwise it could damage inverter.
1.3.13 Precaution of Inverter Abandonment
Inverter belongs to electric electronic device, burning disposal will result lots of harmful gas even
exploding. Please refer to related national laws and regulations to dispose or abandon.
1.3.14 Regarding Adaptable Motor
① this type inverter standard matching motor is quaternary squirrel-cage asynchronous induction
motor or permanent magnet synchronous motor. When the dragging motor is not above type, please
refer to motor rated current to select the suitable inverter.
② the cooling fan of general motor and rotor spindle are coaxial connected. While motor rotating
speed reducing resulted cooling fan Deceleration proportionally and so making heat dissipation worse.
As a conclusion, if motor run at low frequency stage for long time, it is necessary to add a strong
exhaust fan or change the motor to variable frequency motor.
③ Inverter default setup has built-in standard parameter for its adaptive motor, but in actual
application, it is necessary to identify motor parameter or change its original default setup of motor
parameter. Otherwise it affect operation efficiency and protection performance to motor.
④ Due to cable or motor internal short circuit can result in inverter alarm or even exploding. So
insulation and short circuit test on wiring and motor should be done before connecting and installing
motor. If the system has been idled for long time, then a retest should be done to avoid system
-4-
damage or performance reduce.
-5-
Product Information VD520 Series Inverter User Manual
Chapter 2 Product Information

2.1 Designation Rules
Fig 2.1-1 Designation Rules

2.2 Nameplate
Fig 2.2-1 Namepate
● The bar code on inverter nameplate is the only code to recognize its identity, so the bar code is
the most important basis for the after sales service.
2.3 Inverter Series

Table 2-1 Product specifications and technical data
Rated Rated Adaptable Motor

Power
Input Output
Model No. Capacity
Current Current
(kVA) kW HP
(A) (A)
Single-phase Power supply: 220V, 50/60Hz

VD520-2S-0.7GB 1.5 8.2 4.0 0.75 1
VD520-2S-1.5GB 3.0 14.0 7.0 1.5 2
VD520-2S-2.2GB 4.0 23.0 9.6 2.2 3

VD520-2S-3.7GB 5.9 35.0 17.0 3.7 5
VD520-2S-5.5GB 8.9 50.0 25.0 5.5 7.5
-6-
VD520 Series Inverter User Manual Product Information
Three-phase Power supply:380V, 50/60Hz
VD520-4T-0.7GB 1.5 3.4 2.5 0.75 1
VD520-4T-1.5GB 3.0 5.0 3.8 1.5 2
VD520-4T-2.2GB 4.0 5.8 5.1 2.2 3
VD520-4T-3.7GB 5.9 10.5 9.0 3.7 5
VD520-4T-5.5GB VD520-4T-5.5PB 8.9 14.6 13.0 5.5 7.5
VD520-4T-7.5GB VD520-4T-7.5PB 11.0 20.5 17.0 7.5 10
VD520-4T-11GB VD520-4T-11PB 17.0 26.0 25.0 11.0 15

VD520-4T-15GB VD520-4T-15PB 21.0 35.0 32.0 15.0 20
VD520-4T-18.5G VD520-4T-18.5PB 24.0 38.5 37.0 18.5 25
VD520-4T-22G VD520-4T-22P 30.0 46.5 45.0 22 30
VD520-4T-30G VD520-4T-30P 40.0 62.0 60.0 30 40
VD520-4T-37G VD520-4T-37P 50.0 76.0 75.0 37 50
VD520-4T-45G VD520-4T-45P 60.0 92.0 91.0 45 60
VD520-4T-55G VD520-4T-55P 72.0 113.0 112.0 55 70
VD520-4T-75G VD520-4T-75P 100.0 157.0 150.0 75 100
VD520-4T-90G VD520-4T-90P 116.0 180.0 176.0 90 110
VD520-4T-110G VD520-4T-110P 138.0 214.0 210.0 110 150
VD520-4T-132G VD520-4T-132P 167.0 256.0 253.0 132 175
VD520-4T-160G VD520-4T-160P 200.0 307.0 304.0 160 210
VD520-4T-185G VD520-4T-185P 231.0 350.0 326.0 185 240
VD520-4T-200G VD520-4T-200P 250.0 385.0 377.0 200 260
VD520-4T-220G VD520-4T-220P 280.0 430.0 426.0 220 300
VD520-4T-250G VD520-4T-250P 315.0 468.0 465.0 250 350
VD520-4T-280G VD520-4T-280P 355.0 525.0 520.0 280 370
VD520-4T-315G VD520-4T-315P 396.0 590.0 585.0 315 500
VD520-4T-355G VD520-4T-355P 445.0 665.0 650.0 355 420
VD520-4T-400G VD520-4T-400P 520.0 785.0 725.0 400 530
VD520-4T-450G VD520-4T-450P 565.0 883.0 820.0 450 600
VD520-4T-500G VD520-4T-500P 630.0 890.0 860.0 500 660
VD520-4T-560P 700.0 990.0 950 560 750
-7-
2.4 Product Specifications

Table 2-2 Product technical specification
Item Specifications
Grade of rated voltage is 220V or 380V: voltage continued

Rated input fluctuation±10%, brief fluctuation:-15~+10%, voltage
voltage imbalance rated<3%, aberration rate meet IEC61800-2
requirements.
Power input
Rated input
Refer to table 2-1
current
Rated frequency 50/60Hz, fluctuation range ±5%
Standard adaptive
Refer to table 2-1
motor
Rated capacity Refer to table 2-1

Power output
Rated current Refer to table 2-1
Output three-phase under the rated input condition,

Output voltage
0V~rated input voltage, error is less than±3%.
Highest frequency 50.00Hz~600.00Hz
Carrier frequency 0.5kHz~16.0kHz, auto-adjust carrier frequency.
Input frequency
0.01Hz(digit setup mode)
resolution
Control mode Open vector, V/F control
Start torque 0.25Hz/150%( vector control)
Motor type asynchronous motor
Speed range 1: 100
Speed control
±0.2%
Main Control accuracy
Functions Torque control
5%
accuracy
G type motor: 150% rated current for 60sec; 200% rated

current for 1sec.
Overload capacity
P type motor: 120% rated current for 60sec; 150% rated
current for 5sec.
Torque boost Auto torque boost, manual torque boost by 0.1%~10.0%.
Acceleration/decel Linear or S curve acceleration/deceleration mode, 4 types

eration curve of acceleration/deceleration time, range 0.0s~6500.0s.
DC braking frequency: .000Hz~max output frequency,

DC braking braking time: 0.0s~100.0s, braking current:
0.0%~100.0%.
-8-
Jogging frequency range: 0.00Hz~max output frequency,

Jogging control
jog Acceleration/deceleration time 0.0s~3600.0s.
Easy PLC,
Via built-in PLC or control terminal can realize max 16
multi-stage speed
stage speed run.
run
Built-in PID Can realize process control conveniently.

Main Control
Functions Auto-adjustment Can keep the output voltage constant automatically when
of the voltage the grid voltage changed.
Dynamic over
Auto suppress energy feedback value while run
voltage
frequency changes, prevent bus over current tripping off.
suppression
Oscillation Optimize V/F oscillation arithmetic, realize V/F steady

suppression operation.
It ensures that the AC drive continues to run for a short

Power dip ride
time when an instantaneous power failure or sudden
through
voltage reduction occurs.
Individual Timing control function: setting time range:

Timing control
Function 0min-65535min.
Multi-motor Two motors can be switched over via two groups of motor
switchover parameters.
Support extension Support multi-function I/O extension card

Operation panel, control terminals, serial communication
Running
port, you can perform switchover between these sources
command source
in various ways.
There are a total of 11 frequency sources, such as digital
setting, analog voltage setting, analog current setting,
Frequency source pulse setting and serial communication port setting, panel
potentiometer setting, you can perform switchover
between these sources in various ways.
There are 11 auxiliary frequency sources, it can

Auxiliary
implement fine tuning of auxiliary frequency and
frequency source
frequency synthesis.
Operation 6 digit terminal input, 1 terminal support rapid pulse input

on max 100kHz.
2 analog input terminals; with optional 0/4mA to 20mA
Input terminal
current input or 0V to 10V voltage input.
Extension capacity: 3 digital input terminals and 1 analog
input terminals.
2 analog output terminals; with optional 0/4mA to 20mA
current output or -10V to 10V voltage output.
2 digit output terminals; one supporting
Output terminal 0.01KHz~100KHz square signal rapid pulse output.
2 relay output terminal
Extension capacity: 1 digit output terminal.
-9-
LED display Can display 5 parameters

Display and Motor short-circuit detection at power-on, input/output
Keypad Protection phase loss protection, overcurrent protection,
Operation function overvoltage protection, undervoltage protection, overheat
protection and overload protection etc.
Installation Indoor, free from direct, dust, corrosive gas, combustible

location gas, oil smoke, vapor, drip or salt etc.
Lower than 2000m(de-rate if altitude is higher than

Altitude level
2000m).
Ambient -10℃-+40℃(de-rate if the ambient temperature is

Environment temperature between 40℃ and 50℃).
Humidity <95%RH, without condensing..
Vibration <5.9m/s2 (0.6g)
Storage
-20℃- +60℃
temperature
Protection grade IP20
Cooling method Forced air cooling
2.5 Physical Appearance and Main Structure Diagram
Fig 2.5-1 Physical Appearance and Main structure diagram
- 10 -
2.6 Product Appearance and Installation Dimension

W
A D
H
B
Fig 2.6-1Schematic Diagram for Physical Dimensions and Mounting Dimensions (below 7.5kW)
W
A D
H1
H
B
Fig 2.6-2 Schematic Diagram for Physical Dimensions and Mounting Dimensions (11kW~160kW)
W D
W D
A
H
H1
H
B
Fig 2.6-3 Schematic Diagram for Physical Dimensions and Mounting Dimensions (up 185 kW)
Table 2-3 Physical Dimensions and Installation Hole(mm)
- 11 -
Diameter
of Weight
Mounting
Physical Dimensions ( mm) Mounting
Model Hole (mm)
Hole
(mm)
A B H H1 W D d kg
Single-phase 220V, 50/60Hz
VD520-2S-0.7GB
VD520-2S-1.5GB 106.5 175 185 / 118 169 4.5 1.8
VD520-2S-2.2GB
VD520-2S-3.7GB
148 235 247 / 160 191 5.5 3.0
VD520-2S-5.5GB
Three-phase 380V, 50/60Hz
VD520-4T-0.7GB
VD520-4T-1.5GB
106.5 175 185 / 118 169 4.5 1.8
VD520-4T-2.2GB
VD520-4T-3.7GB/5.5PB
VD520-4T-5.5GB/7.5PB
148 235 247 / 160 191 5.5 3.0
VD520-4T-7.5GB/11PB
VD520-4T-11GB/15PB
VD520-4T-15GB/18.5PB 120 308 320 284 190 196.5 6.5 7.5
VD520-4T-18.5G/22P
VD520-4T-22G/30P
VD520-4T-30G/37P 180 396 412 372 260 216.5 8 13.5
VD520-4T-37G/45P
VD520-4T-45G/55P
VD520-4T-55G/75P 260 530 550 510 377 300 8 30
VD520-4T-75G/90P
VD520-4T-90G/110P
350 670 690 640 450 330 9 55
VD520-4T-110G/132P
VD520-4T-132G/160P
350 850 870 810 450 330 9 60
VD520-4T-160G/185P
VD520-4T-185G/200P
900
VD520-4T-200G/220P 400 875 840 530 370 11 85
1350
VD520-4T-220G/250P
- 12 -
VD520-4T-250G/280P
1000
VD520-4T-280G/315P 500 970 940 700 395 13 125
1450
VD520-4T-315G/355P
VD520-4T-355G/400P
VD520-4T-400G/450P 1300
560 1270 1240 800 415 13 200
VD520-4T-450G/500P 1750
VD520-4T-500G/560P
2.7 Physical Dimensions of External Keyboard

88 18
78 13
70 40 50
66 14 2.5
17.5 25.5
17 155
148
109
114
82
2-M4
Physical Dimensions of Keyboard Physical Dimensions of Keyboard holder

Fig 2.7-1 External keyboard and holder dimension
66.5 78.5
109.5
148.5
The mounting hole size of the card mounted The mounting hole size of the card mounted
when the keyboard does not add the tray when the keyboard add the tray
Fig 2.7-2 External keyboard and holder mounting dimension
- 13 -
● This inverter keyboard can be directly connected.

● A holder can be added to keyboard, but need to order separately.
2.8 Braking Unit Model Selection Guide

2.8.1 Resistor Value Selection
The regenerative energy of the motor is almost all consumed in the braking resistor when braking.
According to formula U*U/R=Pb
In formula U---braking voltage when system is stability braking (different system with different value,
for AC380V system, it generally take DC700V)
Pb----braking power
2.8.2 Braking Resistor Power Selection
Theoretically, braking resistor power is the same with braking power, but in consideration that the
de-rating is 70%,
According to formula: 0.7Pr=Pb*D
Pr----power of resistor
D----braking frequency (percentage of regenerating process account for the complete process)
Elevator----20%~30%
Uncoiling and recoiling----20%~30%
Centrifuge----50%~60%
Accidental braking loading----5%
General take 10%
Table 2-4 Inverter braking unit selection
Recommend
Recommend
Resistance Braking
Model Power Braking Remarks
Braking Unit
Resistor
Resistor
Single-phase 220V 50/60Hz
VD520-2S-0.7GB 80W ≥150Ω
VD520-2S-1.5GB 100W ≥100Ω

No special
VD520-2S-2.2GB 100W ≥70Ω Internal
instructions
VD520-2S-3.7GB 200W ≥40Ω
VD520-2S-5.5GB 300W ≥25Ω
Three-phase 380V 50/60Hz
VD520-4T-0.7GB 150W ≥300Ω
VD520-4T-1.5GB 150W ≥220Ω

No special
VD520-4T-2.2GB 250W ≥200Ω Internal
instructions
VD520-4T-3.7GB/5.5PB 300W ≥130Ω
VD520-4T-5.5GB/7.5PB 400W ≥90Ω
- 14 -
VD520-4T-7.5GB/11PB 500W ≥65Ω
VD520-4T-11GB/15PB 800W ≥43Ω No special

Internal
VD520-4T-15GB/18.5PB 1000W ≥32Ω instructions
VD520-4T-18.5G/22P 3.7kW ≥31.5Ω
VD520-4T-22G/30P 4.4kW ≥26.5Ω
VD520-4T-30G/37P 6kW ≥19.4Ω External VDBU-4T-70G
VD520-4T-37G/45P 7.4kW ≥15.8Ω
VD520-4T-45G/55P 9kW ≥13Ω

VD520-4T-55G/75P 11kW ≥10.6Ω External VDBU-4T-110G
VD520-4T-75G/90P 15kW ≥7.8Ω
VD520-4T-90G/110P 18kW ≥6.5Ω

External VDBU-4T-160G
VD520-4T-110G/132P 22kW ≥5.3Ω
VD520-4T-132G/160P 26.4kW ≥4.4Ω

VD520-4T-160G/185P 32kW ≥3.6Ω
VD520-4T-185G/200P 37kW ≥3.2Ω
VD520-4T-200G/220P 40kW ≥2.9Ω

VD520-4T-220G/250P 44kW ≥2.7Ω
VD520-4T-250G/280P 50kW ≥2.3Ω
VD520-4T-280G/315P 56kW ≥2.1Ω
VD520-4T-315G/355P 63kW ≥1.9Ω

VD520-4T-355G/400P 70kW ≥1.7Ω
VD520-4T-400G/450P 80kW ≥1.5Ω
VD520-4T-450G/500P 90kW ≥1.3Ω

VD520-4T-500G/560P 100kW ≥1.2Ω
● Table 2-4 is a guide data, user can select different resistor value and power according to actual
situation.
● Selection of braking resistor is based on the motor generation power in actual application system,
it is related with system inertia, deceleration time, potential load energy, it is decided by user’s
actual situation.
● The greater the inertia of system, the required speed deceleration is shorter, the braking is more
frequent, so the braking resistor require a bigger power small value of resistor.
- 15 -
2.9 Routine Repair and Maintenance of Inverter

The influence of the ambient temperature, humidity, dust and vibration will cause the aging of the
devices in the inverter, which may cause potential fault of the inverter or reduce the service life of the
inverter. Therefore, it is necessary to carry out routine and periodical maintenance on the inverter, it
must be regularly maintenance for every 3~6 months.
2.9.1 Daily Round Check
Daily Inspection Projects
● If the heat from motor and the run inverter is higher than normal temperature
● If any abnormal noise or vibration from motor and the run inverter
● If current value of inverter loading current is as normal level
● If inverter cooling fan is run as normal, if it is stained with oil dirt and speed getting low.
● If the color of main control circuit terminal changed or rusted, if any arc discharge between input
and output phases.
● If the enclosure of inverter is overheat, if inverter inside is filled with dirt or metal powder, or oil dirt
on circuit board or conductive copper bar etc.
● If inverter is installed in cabinet, good ventilation is kept, cooling fan is run as normal.
2.9.2 Regular Maintenance
Regular maintenance item
● Clear inverter cooling air duct regularly, once the speed of cooling fan inside cabinet getting low
or stop, then replace it on time.
● Check if the connecting screws in main circuit and control circuit is loosed, any signs of overheat
on connecting copper bar inside inverter.
● Check if the insulation performance of motor and main circuit cable, any insulation damage of
main circuit and control circuit, especially the surface contacting with metal has cut.
● Non-professional staff or untrained operator cannot do maintenance or change device of the
inverter, failure to comply will result in personal hurt or damage the device.
● User is required to do insulation test on inverter. While testing insulation resistor of motor and
cable, make sure to disconnect inverter in advance. Otherwise the inverter can be damaged.
● If user insist to do insulation test on inverter, make sure all the input output terminal of main
circuit (L, N, R, S, T, U, V, W, P1, P+, PB, P-) are reliably grounded, use a 500V Meg Ohm Meter to
check.
● Do not use a 500V meg ohm meter to check on control circuit terminal, otherwise it can damage
inverter.
2.9.3 Inverter Wearing Part Replacement
Some device inside inverter can get wearing or aged after using for a certain period, in order to
ensure inverter operate reliably, it is necessary to do preventive maintenance, when necessary some
device need to be replaced.
The wearing part of inverter mainly as cooling fan, filtering big capacity electrolytic capacitor. Those
life is closely related with its applicant environment and maintain condition.
- 16 -
● In general condition the inverter cooling fan need to replace for every 2-3 years.
● In general condition the big capacity electrolytic capacitor of inverter need to replace for every 4-5
years.
2.9.4 Inverter Storage
If inverter has to be kept for some time or long time after purchasing, should pay attention to the
following:
● Do not keep it in high temperature, humid or vibrated place with metal powder, and keep good
ventilation.
● If inverter kept too long without run, the filter capacitor performance will reduce. For every 2years,
the inverter should be powered on to restore the performance of big capacity filter capacitor, check
the inverter function. When power on the inverter, an auto-transformer should be applied to
upgrade voltage, and power-on time should less than 5hr.
2.10 Warranty Introduction

For inverter manufactured by our factory, since the date of manufacture, under normal condition
application, if inverter failed or damaged within warranty period, the manufacturer responsible for
repair. If inverter is without in warranty period, user response for reasonable repair charge.
● Free warranty only refers to the frequency converter

● Please keep the machine outer packing boxes and other packaging materials, to facilitate future
inverter relocation or repair and other logistics transportation
2.10.1 In the warranty period, the following reasons lead to the failure of the inverter and
damage, the user must bear part of the maintenance costs.
① The machine failure caused by the user does not use the user manual or beyond the standard
specifications range use;
② The machine failure caused by the user repair and modify;
③ The machine failure caused by the user custody, maintenance improper.
④ Damage caused when the inverter is used for abnormal function;
⑤ The machine failure due to fires, floods, salt corrosion, corrosive gases, earthquake, storm,
lightning, abnormal voltage or other non resistance caused by damage to the machine.
2.10.2 Relevant service charges will be calculated in accordance with the manufacturer's
unified standard, if there is a contract, it is handled according to the relevant provisions of the
contract.
- 17 -
Mechanical and Electrical Installation VD520 Series Inverter User Manual
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

3.1 Installation Environment
The ambient temperature exerts great influences on the service life of the inverter and is not allowed
to exceed the allowable temperature range (-10 ℃ Celsius to 40℃ Celsius).
The inverter shall be mounted on the surface of incombustible articles, with sufficient spaces nearby
for heat sinking;
The inverter shall be mounted in locations free from direct sunlight;
The inverter shall be mounted in locations free from high humidity and condensate, Relative humidity
is lower than 95%;
The inverter shall be mounted in locations free from oil dirt, dust, and metal powder;
The inverter shall be mounted in locations free from corrosive gas, explosive gas or combustible gas.
3.2 The Installation Direction and Space
Install the inverter vertically so that the heat may be expelled from the top. to ensure the heat
dissipation space of the inverter
Fig 3.2-1 Inverter installation diagram

When single unit installation: when the inverter power is less than 15kW, the size A can be omitted.
When the inverter power is higher than15kW, the size A shall be more than 50mm.
When installation of upper and lower parts: when installing the upper and lower parts of the inverter,
the insulating splitter is required.
Mounting Dimension
Power Level
B A
≤15kW ≥100mm
18.5kW-30kW ≥200mm ≥50mm
≥37kW ≥300mm
- 18 -
VD520 Series Inverter User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
3.3 Removing and Mounting the Cover Plate and Keyboard
Fig 3.3-1 Removing and mounting the keyboard diagram

Disassembly of control panel: put the middle finger on upper part of control panel, lightly press the
upper clip and pull out.
Installation of control panel: fixing the bottom hook of panel to the install-claw under the tank of panel,
put middle finger on upper clip and pull in until it fixed.
Fig 3.3-2 Removing and mounting the cover plate of plastic enclosure diagram
Disassemble of plastic enclosure cover: with your finger or tool to hook into the side of the flat bottom
ejection force.
Installation of plastic enclosure cover: fixing the bottom hook of panel to the install-claw under the
tank of panel, put middle finger on upper clip and pull in until it fixed.
- 19 -
Fig 3.3-3 Removing and installing the cover plate of sheet-metal enclosure
Disassembly and installation of sheet-metal enclosure: with cross screwdriver to screw off the two
screws at the bottom of the undercover plate, then loosen the two screws at the top of the undercover
plate, pull-down the undercover plate can be disassemble, reverse order the undercover plate can be
install.
3.4 Inverter and External Electrical Parts Connection
3.4.1 Schematic Diagram for Inverter and External Electrical Parts Connection
Fig 3.4-1 Inverter and external units connection diagram
- 20 -
Table 3-1 the peripheral devices

Must install the isolation switch device such as a obvious
segmentation between the grid and frequency inverter, and ensure the
personal safety when equipment maintenance.
Breaker
The capacity of breaker is 1.5~2 time of frequency inverter rated
current, the time characteristic of breaker should fully consider the
time characteristic of the frequency inverter overload protection.
Due to the output of the inverter is high speed pulse voltage, so there
is a high frequency leakage occurred; when install leakage breaker in
Leakage breaker
the input end of the frequency inverter, please select special type B
leakage breaker, the leakage current set value is 300mA.
In North America, must use delay type fuse(FUSE current rating value
is 225% max load output current) before inverter, avoid the
Delay type fuse
breakdowns and expanded because the equipment failure. Please
refer to table 3-2 selection fuse.
Frequently closed and disconnect contactor will cause inverter fault,

the highest frequency is no more than 10 times/min. When using
braking resistance, in order to prevent damage of breaking resistance
Contactor
is overheating, please install the braking resistance overheat detection
of thermal protection relay, through thermal protection relay contact
control contactor disconnect power supply side.
1.Inverter power supply capacity is greater than 600kVA.

2.On the same power source node has switch type reactive power
compensation capacitor or with silicon controlled phased load, will
produce a lot of peak current, could lead to converter part components
damage.
Input AC reactor or DC
3.When the inverter three-phase power supply voltage unbalance is
reactor
more than 3%, has the potential to cause converter part components
damage.
4.To improve the power factor of the input side of the inverter.
If above situation occurs, please access AC reactor in the frequency
inverter input side or install DC reactor in bus side.
Although the inverter motor with overload protection function, but

when an inverter driving two or more motor or driven multi pole motor,
Thermal protection in order to prevent overheating of the motor accident, please install
relay thermal protection relay in the converter and each motor and the
motor overload protection F8-00 parameter is set to “1” (motor
protection is disabled)
When the connect wire between inverter and motor more than 100m,
suggest install AC output reactor that can suppress high frequency
Output AC reactor
oscillation, to avoid motor insulation damage, leakage current is large
and the inverter frequency protection.
The dotted box type G type 15kW and the following models built in
Braking assembly braking unit, did not elicit P1 terminal; G type 18.5kW and above
models without built-in braking unit, no elicit PB terminal.
- 21 -
The memory of the leakage current of inverter, in order to ensure the

safety of the inverter and motor must grounding, grounding resistance
should be less than 10Ω. The grounding wire should be as short as
possible, wire diameter should conform to table 3-3 standard.
Protective earth
Note: the data in the table in only two conductors using the same
metal case is correct, if not so, protective conductor cross-sectional
area should be through the method of conductivity coefficient
equivalent using the determined.
Table 3-2 The recommended fuse capacity and copper core insulation wire section
Inlet Wire Inlet Wire Inlet Wire

Power Protector Power Protector Power Protector
Fuse(A) Fuse(A) Fuse(A)
7.5kW 20 75kW 200 280kW 800
11kW 32 90kW 250 315kW 1000
15kW 35 110kW 315 355kW 1000
18.5kW 50 132kW 400 400kW 1250
22kW 63 160kW 450 450kW 1500
30kW 80 185kW 560 500kW 1800
37kW 100 200kW 560 560kW 2000

45kW 125 220kW 630
55kW 160 250kW 800
Table 3-3 Conductor cross-sectional area
The smallest conductor cross-section area Sp

Conductor cross-section area S(mm2)
(mm2)
S≤16 S
16＜S≤35 16
35＜S S/2
3.4.2 Guide to the External Electrical Parts

Table 3-4 Selection table of circuit breaker, contactor, wire
Recommend Recommend
Circuit Recommend ed Recommend
ed output
Breaker ed Contactor input side ma ed control
Model No side main
in loop wire loop wire
(A) (A) loop wire
(mm2)
(mm2) (mm2)
Single-phase 220V 50/60Hz
VD520-2S-0.7GB 16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
VD520-2S-1.5GB 20 16 4 2.5 1.0
- 22 -
VD520-2S-2.2GB 32 25 4 4 1.0
VD520-2S-3.7GB 40 32 6 6 1.0
VD520-2S-5.5GB 63 40 6 6 1.0
Three-phase 380V 50/60Hz
VD520-4T-0.7GB 10 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
VD520-4T-1.5GB 16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
VD520-4T-2.2GB 16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
VD520-4T-3.7GB/5.5PB 25 16 4 4 1.0
VD520-4T-5.5GB/7.5PB 32 16 4 4 1.0
VD520-4T-7.5GB/11PB 40 25 4 4 1.0
VD520-4T-11GB/15PB 63 32 4 4 1.0
VD520-4T-15GB/18.5PB 63 40 6 6 1.0
VD520-4T-18.5G/22P 100 40 6 6 1.5
VD520-4T-22G/30P 100 63 10 10 1.5
VD520-4T-30G/37P 125 63 16 16 1.5
VD520-4T-37G/45P 160 100 16 16 1.5
VD520-4T-45G/55P 200 100 25 25 1.5
VD520-4T-55G/75P 200 125 35 35 1.5
VD520-4T-75G/90P 250 125 50 50 1.5
VD520-4T-90G/110P 250 160 70 70 1.5
VD520-4T-110G/132P 350 350 95 95 1.5
VD520-4T-132G/160P 400 400 150 150 1.5
VD520-4T-160G/185P 500 400 185 185 1.5
VD520-4T-185G/200P 630 400 240 240 1.5
VD520-4T-200G/220P 630 630 150*2 150*2 1.5
VD520-4T-220G/250P 630 630 150*2 150*2 1.5
VD520-4T-250G/280P 800 630 185*2 185*2 1.5
VD520-4T-280G/315P 800 800 150*3 150*3 1.5
VD520-4T-315G/355P 800 800 150*3 150*3 1.5
VD520-4T-355G/400P 800 800 150*4 150*4 1.5
VD520-4T-400G/450P 1000 1000 150*4 150*4 1.5
VD520-4T-450G/500P 1000 1000 150*4 150*4 1.5
VD520-4T-500G/560P 1250 1250 185*4 185*4 1.5
- 23 -
Table 3-5 Selection table of input/output AC Reactor, DC reactor

Input AC Reactor Output AC Reactor DC Reactor
Inverter Capacity(kW) Current Inductance Current Inductance Current Inductance
(A) (mH) (A) (mH) (A) (mH)
VD520-4T-0.7GB 5 3.8 5 1.5 / /

VD520-4T-1.5GB 5 3.8 5 1.5 / /
VD520-4T-2.2GB 7 2.5 7 1 / /
VD520-4T-3.7GB/5.5PB 10 1.5 10 0.6 / /
VD520-4T-5.5GB/7.5PB 15 1.0 15 0.25 / /

VD520-4T-7.5GB/11PB 20 0.75 20 0.13 / /
VD520-4T-11GB/15PB 30 0.60 30 0.087 / /
VD520-4T-15GB/18.5PB 40 0.42 40 0.066 / /
VD520-4T-18.5G/22P 50 0.35 50 0.052 40 1.3
VD520-4T-22G/30P 60 0.28 60 0.045 50 1.08
VD520-4T-30G/37P 80 0.19 80 0.032 65 0.80
VD520-4T-37G/45P 90 0.16 90 0.030 78 0.70
VD520-4T-45G/55P 120 0.13 120 0.023 95 0.54
VD520-4T-55G/75P 150 0.10 150 0.019 115 0.45
VD520-4T-75G/90P 200 0.12 200 0.014 160 0.36
VD520-4T-90G/110P 250 0.06 2501 0.011 180 0.33
VD520-4T-110G/132P 250 0.06 250 0.011 250 0.26
VD520-4T-132G/160P 290 0.04 290 0.008 250 0.26
VD520-4T-160G/185P 330 0.04 330 0.008 340 0.18

VD520-4T-185G/200P 400 0.04 400 0.005 460 0.12
VD520-4T-200G/220P 490 0.03 490 0.004 460 0.12
VD520-4T-220G/250P 490 0.03 490 0.004 460 0.12
VD520-4T-250G/280P 530 0.03 530 0.003 650 0.11
VD520-4T-280G/315P 600 0.02 600 0.003 650 0.11
VD520-4T-315G/355P 660 0.02 660 0.002 800 0.06
VD520-4T-355G/400P 400*2 0.04 400*2 0.005 460*2 0.12
VD520-4T-400G/450P 490*2 0.03 490*2 0.004 460*2 0.12

VD520-4T-450G/500P 530*2 0.03 530*2 0.003 650*2 0.11
VD520-4T-500G/560P 600*2 0.02 600*3 0.003 650*2 0.11
- 24 -
3.5 Standard Wiring Diagram

3.5.1 Standard Wiring Diagram for Single-phase 220V Inverter
Fig 3.5-1 Schematic Diagram for single phase 220V Inverter

Precautions are as follows:
1) Terminal ◎refers to Main circuit terminal, terminal ○ refers to control circuit terminal;
2) B which is followed the product model represents standard model built in brake unit
3) Braking resistor’s selection is based on the user demand. refer to Table 2-4;
4) Signal lines and power line must be separated alignments, if you want to control cables and power
cable cross, let them cross by 90 degree angle. It is best to choose shielded twisted-pair cabling for
analogue signal, the selection of power cable is shield three-core cable (The specification should
enlarge a class as much as the ordinary electric cables), or follow the inverter user manual.
- 25 -
3.5.2 Standard Wiring Diagram for Three-phase and Lower than 15kW Inverter:
Fig 3.5-2 Standard Wiring Diagram for three-phase and lower than 15kW Inverter
1) Terminal◎refers to Main circuit terminal, terminal ○ refers to control circuit terminal;
2) B which is followed the product model represents standard model built in brake unit
3) Braking resistor’s selection is based on the user demand. refer to table 2-4;
enlarge a file as much as the ordinary electric cables), or follow the inverter user manual
- 26 -
3.5.3 Standard Wiring Diagram for Three-phase and High than 18.5kW Inverter:
Fig 3.5-3 Standard Wiring Diagram for three-phase 18.5Kw and above Inverter
1) Terminal◎refers to Main circuit terminal, Terminal ○ refers to control circuit terminal;
2) B which is followed the product model represents standard model built in brake unit;
3) Braking resistor’s selection is based on the user demand refer to Fig 2-4;
enlarge a file as much as the ordinary electric cables), or follow the inverter user manual.
3.6 Main Circuit Terminals
3.6.1 Wiring Diagram of Connection of Main Circuit Terminals
3.6.1.1 Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Single-phase 220V Inverter
Fig 3.6-1 Wiring diagram of main circuit of single phase 220V inverter
3.6.1.2 Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Three-phase and Lower Than 2.2kw Inverter
- 27 -
Fig 3.6-2 Wiring diagram of main circuit of three-phase and lower than 2.2kW inverter
3.6.1.3 Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Three-phase 3.7kw-15kw Inverter
Fig 3.6-3 Wiring diagram of main circuit of three-phase 3.7kw-15kw inverter

3.6.1.4 Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Three-phase and Higher Than 18.5kw Inverter
Fig 3.6-4 Wiring diagram of main circuit of three-phase and higher than 18.5kw inverter
3.6.2 Instructions of Main Circuit Terminals of Inverter:
Table 3-6 Instructions of main circuit terminals of inverter
Terminals Function Instruction
Single-phase power supply input terminals, external connection of grid single

L, N
phase 220VAC power supply
Input terminal of AC 3-phase power supply, external connection of grid 3phase AC

R, S, T
power supply
U, V, W Output terminal of 3phase power supply, external connection of AC 3phase motor
Positive and negative terminals of DC bus, external connection of braking unit

P+, P-
terminal
P+, PB External connection of braking resistor terminal
P1, P+ External connection of DC electric reactor terminal
Grounding terminal
- 28 -
● The voltage class of VD520 series inverter 3phase power has two grades: 220V, 380V, before
connecting power, please make sure the power class on inverter nameplate is the same with the
accessing power. Otherwise do not connect.
● DC bus P+ P-terminal: take note that when power outrage there is residual voltage on DC bus P+
P- terminal, need to wait for a while until CHARGE LED off. Otherwise it is danger of electric shock.
● When selecting external braking unit, note the polarity of P+, P- cannot be reversely connect,
otherwise it can result in damage or even fire.
Do not directly connect braking resistor to DC bus, it may result damage or fire.
1) Input power L, N or R, S T: the cable connection at input side of the inverter has no phase
sequence requirement.
2) Braking unit cable length should not exceed 10m, twisted pair or double cable parallel wiring
should be used.
3) Braking resistor connecting terminal P+, PB: confirm whether the device has built-in braking
unit, its braking resistor connecting terminal is effect. The braking resistor selection table2-4
recommending value and the wiring distance should less than 5M. Otherwise it can damage
inverter.
4) External DC reactor connecting terminal P1, P+: for external DC reactor to 18.5kW and above
power inverter, get rid of the connector between P1, P+ terminal during installation, reactor is
installed between the 2 terminal.
5) Inverter output side U, V, W: the output side cannot connect capacitor or surge absorber,
otherwise it will affect inverter in self-protection frequently or damage.
6) In case the motor cable is too long, it may generate electrical resonance easily due to the impact
of distributed capacitance, thus damaging the motor insulation or generating higher leakage
current to invoke over current protection of the inverter. When the length of motor cable is longer
than 100 meters, it needs to install an AC output reactor.
7) Earth terminal PE: This terminal shall be grounded reliably, with resistance of earth cable of
less than 10Ω. Otherwise, it may cause fault or damage the inverter.
Do not share the earth terminal with zero line N terminal, otherwise it will result equipment
abnormal run or damage.
- 29 -
3.7 Control Circuit Terminal

3.7.1 Control Terminals and Functional
LED
J6
CPU
J7
J15J5J3J4 J14 J19

A A A
V V V
485+ 485- 5/10V AI2 AO1 HDI1 DI2 DI4 OPEN +24V COM T1/A T1/B T1/C
PE GND AI1 GND AO2 DI1 DI3 DI5 COM HDO1 DO1 T2/A T2/C
Fig 3.7-1 Diagram of main control board and function extension card connection
3.7.2 Description of Control Circuit Terminal
Table 3-7 Description of control circuit terminal
Terminal Terminal
Type Function
Sign Name
1. Provide +5V/10V power supply for

external-units, the maximum output current is
20mA. J15 jumper on main control board to
External select 5V or 10V power output, default is 10V.
5V/10V-GND 5V/10V power 2. It is generally used as the operating power
supply
supply for the external potentiometer, the
Power Supply potentiometer resistance range is 1kΩ~10KΩ.
3. The Maxmium output current 20mA.
1. Provide +24V power supply for external

units. It is generally used as the operating
24V power power supply for digital input/output terminals
+24V-COM
supply and the external sensor.
2. The maximum output current is 200mA.
- 30 -
1. Connect to 24V by default, J14 jumper on

main control board to select +24V or COM
External connection.
Power Supply OPEN power input 2. When external power is used to drive
terminal DI1~DI5, HDI1, OPEN needs to connect to
the external power supply and disconnect
J14(disconnecting with +24V/COM).
RS-485
Communicati Standard RS-485 communication terminal,
485+-485- communicatio
on should use twisted pair cable
n terminals
Analog input 1. Input Voltage range : DC 0V to 10V

AI1-GND
terminal 1 2. Input resistance : 22kΩ
1. Input range : DC 0V to 10V or

0/4mA~20mA, can be selected by J5 jumper
Analog Input on main control board, default DC0V~10V
Analog input signal;
AI2-GND
terminal 2
2. Input impedance: under voltage input-22
kΩ,
under current input 500Ω.
Digital input 1. Optical coupling isolation, compatible with

DI1-COM
terminal 1
dual polarity input, internal resistance 3.3kΩ;
Digital input 2. Multi-function digital input, through
DI2-COM
terminal 2 F5-01-F5-05 to set function.
Digital input 3. The inverter default +24v power supply
DI3-COM built-in, COM is common terminal.
terminal 3
4. When using external power, JP14 should
Digital input be suspended, external +24V connect to
DI4-COM
terminal 4 OPEN terminal, COM is common
Digital Input Digital input terminal(external voltage supply range
DI5-COM +24V±10%).
terminal 5
1. When used as general digit input, it is the

same function as DI1~DI5;
2. Can be combine with OPEN terminal as
High speed bipolar high speed pulse input terminals, max
HDI1-COM pulse input input frequency is 100kHz。
terminal
3. When use external power, input voltage
range +24V±10%;
4. The internal impedance 1.65 kΩ
Support 0V~10V voltage or 0/4mA~20mA

Analog output
AO1-GND current output, decided by jumper J3, default
Analog terminal 1
0V~10V voltage output
Output Digital
Output Support 0V~10V voltage or 0/4mA~20mA
Analog output
AO2-GND current output, decided by jumper J4, default
terminal 2
0V~10V voltage output
- 31 -
1. Optical coupling isolation, dual polarity

open collector output;
Digital output
DO1-COM 2. Pull-up voltage range: 5V~24V (pull-up
1
resistance range: 0.48kΩ~10kΩ);
3. Output current range: 2mA~50mA.
1. When used as general digital output, same

function as DO1;
2. Can be combined with the OPEN terminal
Rapid pulse as bipolar high speed pulse output terminals,
HDO1-COM max output frequency is 100kHz;
input terminal
3. Pull-up voltage range: 5V-24V(pull-up
resistance range: 0.48kΩ~10kΩ).
4. Output current range: 2mA~50mA
Relay T1
normally
T1/A-T1/B
closed
terminal
Relay T1 Contact driving capacity:

Relay Output normally
T1/A-T1/C AC250V, 3A, DC 30V, 5A
open terminal
Relay T2
T2/A-T2/C normally
open terminal
1. Used to control cable shield grounding,

when the interference is big on site or control
Shield cable cable is too long, the PE should be well
Ground PE ground grounded to reduce EMC affect.
terminal 2. PE terminal is not allowed to connect with
power N line, otherwise will damaged the
inverter
3.7.3 Jumper Switchover Function Description
Table 3-8 Jumper switchover function description
Jumper Jumper
Function
Code Selection
When jump cap plug connect to A, AO1 terminal select

A terminal
DC0/4mA-20mA current signal output
J3
When jump cap plug connect to V, AO1 terminal select DC0V-10V
V terminal
voltage signal output
When jump cap plug connect to A, AO2 terminal select

A terminal
J4
When jump cap plug connect to V, AO2 terminal select DC0V-10V
V terminal
voltage signal output
- 32 -
When jump cap plug connect to A, AI2 terminal select

A terminal
J5
When jump cap plug connect to V, AI2 terminal select DC0V-10V
V terminal
voltage output
When jump cap plug connect to 24V, OPEN terminal connect with
24V terminal
+24V, and HDI1, DI1~DI5 with COM short circuit input effective.
J14
When jump cap plug connect to 24V, OPEN terminal connect with
COM terminal
COM, and HDI1, DI1~DI5 with +24V short circuit input effective.
When jump cap plug connect to +5V, terminal +5V/10V-GND on

+5V terminal
main board provide power supply +5V
J15
When jump cap plug connect to +10V, terminal +5V/10V-GND on
+10V terminal
main board provide power supply +10V
3.7.4 Socket Connection Function Description
Table 3-9 Socket connection function description
Socket
Function Description
Code
Control J6 is connection port of main control board and power board,

J6 board-power power board supply power to main control board and is electric
board signal gateway between the 2 parts
Control J7 is connection port of extension card and main control board,

J7 board-extension main control board supply power to extension card and is electric
card signal gateway between the 2 parts
This plug is connection port of main control board and LED panel,
Control
LED main control board supply power to LED panel and is electric
board-LED panel
signal gateway between the 2 parts
Control This plug is connection port of main control board and MFI port,
MFI board-MFI main control board supply power to MFI port and is electric signal
interface gateway between the 2 parts
3.7.5 Main Control Terminal Wiring Description
3.7.5.1 Digital Input Terminal
Fig 3.7-2 Schematic diagram for connection of terminal of digital input
- 33 -
Fig 3.7-3 Diagram of digital input terminal with external power connection
Use external power(power must comply with UL CLASS 2 standard, a 4A fuse protector should be
added between power and port), wiring diagram as Fig 3.7-3 showed.(take note to remove the
connect wire between J14 jumper OPEN and +24V terminal)
3.7.5.2 Analog Input Terminal
Since the weak analog voltage signal is easy to suffer external interferences, it needs to use shielded
twist cable generally and the length shall be no longer than 20meters, as shown in Fig 3.7-4, 3.7-5. In
case the analog signal is subject to severe interference, and analog signal source side shall be
installed with filter capacitor or ferrite magnetic core, as shown in Fig 3.7-6.
≤20m J15
10V 5/10V 5V
5/10V
Potentionmeter AI1、AI2 J5
V AI2 A
GND
Address PE
VicRuns
External circuit Internal circuit
Fig 3.7-4 Schematic diagram of analog input terminal input voltage signal with shield twist cable
Fig 3.7-5 Schematic diagram of analog input terminal input current signal with shield twist cable
- 34 -
Fig 3.7-6 Schematic diagram of analog input terminal cable jacket ferrite magnetic ring
3.7.5.3 Digital Output Terminal Using Internal Power Supply
Fig 3.7-7 Schematic diagram of digital output terminal using internal power supply
Fig 3.7-8 Schematic diagram of high speed pulse output terminal using internal power supply
HDO1 in figure 3.7-7 as a digital output terminal (F6-00 set to 1), namely to DO1 function and
connection mode are the same
3.7.5.4 Digital Output Terminal Using External Power
- 35 -
Fig 3.7-9 Schematic diagram of digital output terminal using external power
Fig 3.7-10 Schematic diagram of high speed pulse output using external power
HDO1 Fig 3.7-10 as high speed pulse terminals (F6-00 set to 0)
3.7.5.5 Output Terminals of Analog
Fig 3.7-11 Schematic diagram of analog output of voltage signal
- 36 -
Fig 3.7-12 Schematic diagram of terminal of analog output of current signal

3.7.5.6 Output Terminals of Relay
A use internal DC24V power
B use external AC220V power

Fig 3.7-13 Schematic diagram of relay output terminal
- 37 -
Operation and Display VD520 Series Inverter User Manual
Chapter 4 Operation and Display

4.1 Introduction to Operation and Display Interface
With the operation panel, it can perform such operations on the inverter as function parameter
modification, inverter working status monitoring and inverter run control (startup and stop).
Refer to Fig 4.1-1 for the physical appearance and functional zone of the operation panel:
RUN FWD/REV L/R Hz A V
- +
LED DIGITAL PANEL
JOG MENU
REV ESC
ENTER
DATA
STOP
RUN RESET
Fig 4.1-1 Operation panel schematic

4.1.1 Keyboard Button Description
Buttons Name Function Description
Enter or escape from the first level menu and remove

Programming key
the parameters quickly
Enter the menu step-by-step

Enter key
Confirm parameters
UP key Increase data or function code progressively
DOWN key Decrease data or function code progressively
Move right to select the displaying parameters circularly

in stopping and running mode.
Right-shift key
Select the parameters modifying digit during the
parameter modification
- 38 -
VD520 Series Inverter User Manual Operation and Display
This key is used to operate on the inverter in key

Run key
operation mode
This key is used to stop in running state and it is limited

Stop/Reset key
by function code F7-01
The function of this key is confirmed by function code

Quick key
F7-00
4.1.2 Description of Function LED Indictor
Name Description
When it is off, it indicates the inverter is in stop status; when it is on, it

RUN
indicates the rotation status; light flashes that inverter in automatic running.
It is the LED indictor for forward/reverse rotation. When it is on, it indicates

FWD/REV the inverter is in forward rotation status; when it is off, it indicates the inverter
is in reverse rotation
When it’s off, it indicates the keypad operation control status; when it’s on, it
L/R indicates the terminal operation control status; when it’s flicker, it indicates
the remote operation control status
Hz The unit of frequency(Hz)
A The unit of current(A)
V The unit of voltage(V)
RPM The unit of rotation speed(RPM)
% Unit:%
4.1.3 Description of Function Code Viewing and Modification Methods
The operation panel of the inverter adopts three-level menu structure to carry out operations such as
parameter setting.
The three-level menu includes function parameter set (level 1 menu)→Function code (level 2
menu)→Function code setup value (level 3 menu). Refer to Fig.4.1-2 for the operation procedure.
Fig 4.1-2 Three level menu operation flow chart

When operating on level 2 menu, press MENU/ESC key or ENTER/DATA key to return to level 1
menu. The difference between them is described as follows:
Pressing ENTER/DATA KEY will save the setup parameter and return to the level 1 menu and then
automatically shift to the next function code, while pressing MENU/ESC key will directly return to level
1 menu without saving the parameter, and it will return to the current function code.
In level 2 menu status, while one Bit flashing user can change its value via ^/v. If there is 2Bit need
change then press >> to shift to the desired Bit for value revise. If the parameter has no flashing Bit, it
means it is unchangeable. Reason as following:
1) The function code is an unchangeable parameter, such as actual detection parameter, run record
parameter, etc; the parameter values whether in running or stooping conditions are normally on
display.
- 39 -
Operation and Display VD520 Series Inverter User Manual
2) The function code cannot be modified in running status, and inverter in running state, it can be
modified only after the it stopped; the parameter values in the condition of running normally on display,
in the condition of stop flashing.
4.1.4 State Display
The state display of operation panel is divided into stopping states parameter display, run state
parameter display, function code parameter editing state display and fault alarm state display and so
on.
1. Stop parameter display state
When the inverter is in the stopping state, the keyboard will display stopping parameters which is
shown in figure. The 3Bits on right indicator stand for the unit of the parameter, the 3Bits on left
indicator stand for current status. Such as, the run direction signal is reverse, then FWD/REV light on.
Select check menu(also called user setup/user customize), only display the function code which is
different from parameter set value and manufacturer value, press ^/v can browse function code which
is different from all the parameter set value and manufacturer value, are convenient for the user to
confirm which parameter are changed.
Press>> key can display stop status parameter recycling. Function code F7-05 defines stop status
parameter.
2. Displayed state of run parameters
After the inverter receives enabled run commands, the inverter will enter into the run state and the
keypad will display the run parameters. RUN is on while the FWD/REV is determined by the current
run direction which is shown as flow.
Press>> key can display run status parameter recycling. Can view the shutdown status parameter by
the function code F7-03 and F7-04 definition.
3. Function code editing status
In stop/run/error alarm status, press MENU/ESC key can enter into edit state (if with password then
input it, refer to FF-00). Edit status has 2 levels menu in sequence: function code group or function
code----function code parameter, press ENTER/DATA key enter into function parameter display status.
In function parameter display status, press the ENTER/DATA key to save and jump to the next
parameter, press MENU/ESC to quit to previous parameter.
4.2 Motor Parameter Self-learning
Select vector control mode, before inverter operation, must input the parameter from the nameplate of
the motor, VD520 series inverter will match standard motor parameter according to this message.
Vector control mode is highly dependent on motor parameter, so to acquire good control performance,
it needs correct motor parameter.
Pay attention to below points during motor parameter self-learning.
1) Firstly to set run command source parameter F0-01=0 as control panel command channel, if motor
self-learning required, then remove motor loading.
2) Input motor nameplate parameter correctly, including rate power/rate voltage/rate current/rate
frequency/rate RPM, its corresponding function code F2-01~F2-05. If select motor 2, corresponding
function code A2-01~A2-05
3) Via set function code F2-26 to select self-learning type, press ENTER/DATA to confirm displayed
“-TUN-”. Press RUN to start motor self-learning, and RUN light on, motor parameter self-learning is
beginning. Once it is completed, LED will display “END”.
4) After motor self-learning check F2-10 parameter, generally this value less than 60% of rate current
F2-03, if not it is abnormal, need to do self-learning again, and confirm if motor is with empty loading.
5) When it is unavailable to get motor nameplate message, manufacturer set value can be used. It is
only need to input motor power(motor 1 is F2-01, motor 2 is A2-01), no need motor self-learning.
6) If need to get the motor self-learning result recovered to manufacturer value, only need to revise
motor rate power(motor 1 is F2-01, motor 2 is A2-01) then change back to required power, the
parameter after self-learning can recover to manufacturer value automatically.
7) During self-learning process to press STOP/RESET to stop self-learning. Note the start/stop of
- 40 -
VD520 Series Inverter User Manual Operation and Display
self-learning can only be operated by keypad. After self-learning, the function code recover to 0.
4.3 Password Setting
The VD520 series inverter provides user password protection function. When FF-00 is set to non-zero
value, it indicates the user password, and the password protection turns enabled after exiting the
function code editing status. When pressing MENU/ESC key again enter function code to view/edit
state, “0.0.0.0.0.” will be displayed, and common menu cannot be entered until user password is input
correctly.
4.4 Parameter Lock (authority lower than password)
VD520 series inverter provide user parameter lock protection, when FF-04 is 1, lock is effective.
Without setting user password, it can protect user parameter or prevent user get parameter initialized.
- 41 -
Function Parameter Table VD520 Series Inverter User Manual
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table

The symbols in the function table are described as follows:
○——It indicates that the parameter setup value can be modified when the inverter is in run state;
◎——It indicates that the parameter setup value cannot be modified when the inverter is in the run
state;
●——It indicates that the numerical value of the parameter is the actually measured value, which
cannot be modified;
☆——It indicates this parameter is “Factory default parameter” and can be set only by the
manufacturer.
F0 Basic Parameter Group
Factory
Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property
Code
Value
Led unit’s digit: motor 1

0: V/F control
Motor Control 1: SVC
F0-00 0x00 ◎
Mode Led ten’s digit: motor 2
0: V/F control
1: SVC
0: Control panel command source

(L/R OFF)
Running 1: Terminal command source
F0-01 Command Source 0 ○
Selection (L/R ON)
2: communication command source
(L/R flashes)
0: Digital setting(F0-09, UP/DOWN

can be modified, no memory when
power failure)
1: Digital setting(F0-09, UP/DOWN
can be modified, memory when power
failure)
2: AI1
Main Frequency
3: AI2
F0-02 Source A 10 ◎
4: Reserved
Selection
5: PULSE setting
6: MS reference
7: Simple PLC
8: PID
9: Communication setting
10: Keypad potentiometer
Main Frequency
F0-03 0.000~10.000 1.000 ○
A Gain
- 42 -
VD520 Series Inverter User Manual Function Parameter Table
Auxiliary
Frequency Same as F0-02(Main Frequency
F0-04 0 ◎
Source A Source A Selection)
Selection
Unit’s digit: frequency source

selection
0: Main frequency source A
1: Main auxiliary operation
result(operational relationship is
determined by ten Bits)
2: Main frequency source A switching
Frequency Source with auxiliary frequency source B
F0-05 Superposition 3: Main frequency source A switching 0x00 ○
Selection with main auxiliary operation result
Ten’s digit: frequency source main
auxiliary operation relationship
0: Main + auxiliary
1: Main – auxiliary
2: Max value of the two
3: Min value of the two
Auxiliary
Frequency Source
B Range 1: Relative to the max frequency
F0-06 0 ○
Reference 2: Relative to frequency source A
Selection when
Superimposed
Auxiliary
Frequency Source
F0-07 0%~150% 100% ○
B Range when
Superimposed
Auxiliary
Frequency Source
F0-08 B Offset 0.00Hz~max frequency F0-10 0.00Hz ○
Frequency when
Superimposed
Digital Setting
F0-09 0.00Hz~max frequency (F0-10) 50.00Hz ○
Frequency
F0-10 Max Frequency 50.00Hz~600.00Hz 50.00Hz ◎
0: F0-12 setting
1: AI1
Frequency Upper 2: AI2
F0-11 0 ◎
Limit Source 3: Reserved
4: PULSE setting
Frequency Upper Frequency lower limit F0-14~max

F0-12 50.00Hz ○
Limit frequency F0-10
- 43 -
Frequency Upper
F0-13 0.00Hz~max frequency F0-10 0.00Hz ○
Limit Offset
Frequency Lower
F0-14 0.00Hz~frequency upper limit F0-12 0.00Hz ○
Limit
Frequency
F0-15 Command 2: 0.01Hz 2 ●
Resolution
Frequency
Command 0: Running frequency
F0-16 UP/DOWN 0 ◎
Reference in 1: Setting frequency
Running
Digital Setting
Frequency 0: No memory
F0-17 0 ○
Memory Selection 1: Memory
when Stop
Acceleration Time Model

F0-18 0.00s~65000s ○
1 dependent
Deceleration Time Model

F0-19 0.00s~65000s ○
1 dependent
Acceleration / 0: 1s
F0-20 Deceleration Time 1: 0.1s 1 ◎
Unit 2: 0.01s
Acceleration and 0: Max frequency(F0-10)

Deceleration Time
F0-21 1: Setting frequency 0 ◎
Reference
Frequency 2: 100Hz
Unit’s digit: Operation panel

command binding frequency source
selection
0: No binding
1: Digital setting frequency
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: Reserved
5: PULSE setting
Command Source
F0-22 Bound Frequency 6: MS reference 0x0000 ○
Source 7: Simple PLC
8: PID
Ten’s digit: terminal command binding
frequency source selection, same as
above
Hundred’s digit: communication
selection, same as above
Thousand’s digit: Automatic operation
- 44 -

selection, same as above
Communication
F0-23 0: Modbus 0 ●
Protocol Selection
0: Motor 1
F0-24 Motor Selection 0 ◎
1: Motor 2
1: G type
(Constant torque load model)
F0-25 GP Type Selection 1 ◎
2: P type
(Fan, pump type load models)
F1 Start/Stop Control Group
Factory
Function
Code
Value
0: Direct start
1: Speed tracking restart
F1-00 Start Mode 0 ○
2: Pre excitation start
(AC asynchronous )
Starting
F1-01 0.00Hz~10.00Hz 0.50Hz ○
Frequency
Startup Frequency
F1-02 0.00s~100.00s 0.0s ◎
Holding Time
Starting DC
Braking Current /
F1-03 0%~100% 0% ◎
Pre-excitation
Current
Starting DC
Braking Time /
F1-04 0.0s~100.0s 0.0s ◎
Pre-excitation
Time
LED unit’s digit: tracking direction

selection
0: According to the actual test
direction
Speed Tracking 1: According to the setting frequency
F1-05 direction 0x10 ○
Mode
LED ten’s digit: zero speed excitation
selection
0: No exciting
1: Exciting
Delay Time of
F1-06 Rotation Speed 0ms~2000ms 500ms ○
Tracking
- 45 -
Voltage Rise Rate

F1-07 of Rotation Speed 0~1000 100 ○
Tracking
0: Decelerate to stop
F1-08 Stop Mode 0 ○
1: Coast to stop
Initial Frequency
F1-09 of Stop DC 0.00Hz~max frequency 0.00Hz ○
Braking
Waiting Time of
F1-10 0.0s~100.0s 0.0s ○
Stop DC Braking
Stop DC Braking
F1-11 0%~100% 0% ○
Current
Stop DC Braking
F1-12 0.0s~100.0s 0.0s ○
Time
F1-13 Stop Frequency 0.00Hz~max frequency 0.50 ○
Stop Frequency
F1-14 0.0s~60.0s 0.0s ○
Holding Time
Restart Selection 0: Enabled

F1-15 Upon Power 0 ○
Failure 1: Disabled
Waiting Time of
F1-16 Restart Upon 0.0s~60.0s 0.0s ○
Power Failure
Operation Mode of
Setting Frequency 0: Running with frequency lower limit
F1-17 is Lower than the 1: Stop 0 ○
Frequency Lower 2: Zero speed running
Limit
Start Selection of
Setting Frequency 0: Don’t start
F1-18 1 ◎
is Lower than the 1: Zero speed running
Start Frequency
0: Same direction
F1-19 Run Direction 0 ○
1: Opposite direction
Reverse Control 0: Allow reverse

F1-20 0 ○
Enable 1: Prohibit reverse
FWD/REV
F1-21 Rotation 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ○
Dead-zone Time
Dynamic Braking 0: Disabled

F1-22 0 ○
Enable 1: Enabled
Braking Usage
F1-23 0%~100% 100% ○
Rate
- 46 -
0: The whole is valid

1: Only overpressure stall enable
Over-excitation effectively
F1-24 2 ◎
Effective Range 2: Only deceleration process
effectively
3: The whole is invalid
Over-excitation
F1-25 0~200 100 ○
Gain
Over-excitation
F1-26 0~10 3 ○
Filter Coefficients
0: Straight-line
Acceleration / acceleration/deceleration
F1-27 Deceleration 0 ◎
1: S curve acceleration/deceleration A
Mode
2: S curve acceleration/deceleration B
Time Ratio of S
F1-28 Curve Start 0.0%~(100.0%-F1-26) 30.0% ◎
Segment
Time Ratio of S
F1-29 Curve End 0.0%~(100.0%-F1-25) 30.0% ◎
Segment
Zero Frequency 0: Have voltage output

F1-30 Voltage Output 0 ○
Selection 1: Non voltage output
Jog Speed 0: Disabled

F1-31 Tracking Effective 1 ○
Selection 1: Enabled
F2 Motor 1 Parameter
Factory
Function
Code
Value
0: Ordinary asynchronous motor

Motor Type
F2-00 1: Frequency conversion 0 ◎
Selection
asynchronous motor
Rated Motor Model

F2-01 0.1kW~1000.0kW ◎
Power dependent
Rated Motor Model

F2-02 1V~2000V ◎
Voltage dependent
0.01A~655.35A
Rated Motor Model
F2-03 (Inverter power≤55kW) ◎
Current dependent
0.1A~6553.5A (Inverter power>55kW)
Rated Motor Model

F2-04 0.01Hz~max frequency ◎
Frequency dependent
- 47 -
Rated Motor Model

F2-05 1RPM~65535RPM ◎
Rotation Speed dependent
0.001Ω~65.535Ω
Asynchronous (Inverter power≤55kW) Tune
F2-06 Motor Stator ◎
0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω parameter
Resistance
(Inverter power>55kW)
0.001Ω~65.535Ω
Asynchronous (Inverter power≤55kW) Tune
F2-07 Motor Rotor ◎
0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω parameter
Resistance
0.01mH ~655.35mH
Asynchronous
Motor Leakage (Inverter power≤55kW) Tune
F2-08 ◎
Inductive 0.001mH ~65.535Mh parameter
Reactance
0.1mH~6553.5mH
Asynchronous
Motor Mutual (Inverter power≤55kW) Tune
F2-09 ◎
Inductive 0.01mH ~655.35mH parameter
Reactance
Asynchronous 0.01A~F2-03 (Inverter power≤55kW) Tune
F2-10 Motor No-load ◎
0.1A~F2-03 (Inverter power>55kW) parameter
Current
0: No operation
1: Asynchronous motor static tuning
F2-26 Tune Selection 0 ◎
2: Asynchronous motor complete
tuning
F3 Motor 1 Vector Control Parameter
Factory
Function
Code
Value
Speed Loop
F3-00 Proportional Gain 01~100 30 ○
1
Speed Loop
F3-01 0.01s~10.00s 0.50s ○
Integral Time 1
Switch Frequency
F3-02 0.00~F3-05 5.00Hz ○
1
Speed Loop
F3-03 Proportional Gain 1~100 20 ○
2
Speed Loop
F3-04 0.01s~10.00s 1.00s ○
Integral Time 2
- 48 -
Switch Frequency
F3-05 F3-02~max frequency 10.00Hz ○
2
Vector Control Slip

F3-06 20%~200% 100% ○
Gain
Speed Loop Filter

F3-07 0.000s~0.100s 0.000s ○
Time Constant
0: Encode F3-10 setting

1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Motor Torque
4: PULSE setting
F3-09 Upper Limit 0 ○
Source 5: Communication setting
6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
7: MAX (AI1, AI2)
The full scale of options 1~7
corresponding to the F3-10
Digital Setting for

F3-10 Motor Torque 0%~200.0% 150.0% ○
Upper Limit
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Brake Torque
4: PULSE setting
F3-11 Upper Limit 0 ○
6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
7: MAX (AI1, AI2)
Digital Setting for

F3-12 Brake Torque 0%~200.0% 150.0% ○
Upper Limit
Excitation
F3-13 Adjustment 0~60000 2000 ○
Proportional Gain
Excitation
F3.14 Adjustment 0 ~60000 1300 ○
Integral Gain
Torque
F3-15 Adjustment 0~60000 2000 ○
Proportional Gain
Torque
F3-16 Adjustment 0~60000 1300 ○
Integral Gain
- 49 -
Speed Loop
Integral 0: Disabled
F3-17 0 ○
Separation 1: Enabled
Enable
Max Weak
F3-20 1%~300% 50% ○
Magnetic Current
Weak Magnetic
F3-21 Automatic Gain 10%~500% 100% ○
Adjustment
Weak Magnetic
F3-22 2~10 2 ○
Integral Multiples
Torque Boost
F3-23 0.0%~60.0% 10.0% ○
Coefficient
Torque Boost
F3-24 0.00Hz~max frequency 20.00 ○
Cutoff Frequency
Exciting Current
F3-25 Compensation 0~500 0 ○
Gain
Torque Current
F3-26 Compensation 0~500 0 ○
Gain
Torque Response
F3-27 1~1000 10 ○
Gain
F4 Motor 1 V/F Control Parameter
Factory
Function
Code
Value
0: Straight line V/F

1: Multipoint V/F
2: Square V/F
3: 1.2#power V/F
F4-00 VF Curve Setting 4: 1.4#power V/F 0 ◎
5: 1.6#power V/F
6: 1.8#power V/F
7: V/F complete separation mode
8: V/F half separation mode
Torque Boost 0: Automatic torque boost

F4-01 0 ◎
Mode Selection 1: Manual torque boost
Manual Torque Model

F4-02 0.0%~30.0% ○
Boost dependent
Manual Torque
F4-03 Boost Cutoff 0.00Hz~max frequency 50.00Hz ◎
Frequency
- 50 -
MS VF Frequency
F4-04 0.00Hz~F4-05 0.00Hz ◎
Point 1
MS VF Voltage
F4-05 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ◎
Point 1
MS VF Frequency
F4-06 F4-03~F4-07 0.00Hz ◎
Point 2
MS VF Voltage
F4-07 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ◎
Point 2
MS VF Frequency F4-05~Rated motor frequency

F4-08 0.00Hz ◎
Point 3 (F2-04)
MS VF Voltage
F4-09 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ◎
Point 3
VF Slip
F4-10 Compensation 0.0%~200.0% 0.0% ◎
Gain
VF Oscillation 0: Mode 0
F4-11 0 ◎
Suppresion Mode 1: Mode 1
VF Oscillation Model
F4-12 0~100 ○
Suppression Gain dependent
V/F Maxmium
Regulation of
F4-13 0~1000 200 ○
Oscillation
Suppression
0: Digital setting (F4-14)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: Reserve
The Separation of 4: PULSE setting
F4-14 VF Voltage 5: MS instruction 0 ○
Source
6: Simple PLC
7: PID
8: Communication given
Remark: 100% corresponding rated
motor voltage
VF Separation
F4-15 Voltage Digital 0V~rated motor voltage 0V ○
Setting
0.0s~1000.0s
VF Separation
F4-16 Remark: Indication the time that 0V 5.0s ○
Voltage Rise Time
rise to rated motor voltage
0.0s~1000.0s
VF Separation
F4-17 Remark: Indication the time that rated 5.0s ○
Voltage Fall Time
motor voltage drop to 0V
- 51 -
F5 Input Terminal
Factory
Function
Code
Value
0: Two-line mode 1
1: Two-line mode 2
Terminal 2: Three-line mode 1
F5-00 0 ◎
Command Mode 3: Three-line mode 2
4: Alternate control
5: Back and forth control
DI1 Terminal 0: No function

F5-01 Function 1: Forward running (FWD) 1 ◎
Selection
2: Reverse running (REV)
DI2 Terminal 3: Three-line mode run control
F5-02 Function 2 ◎
Selection 4: Forward Jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse Jog (RJOG)
DI3 Terminal
F5-03 Function 6: Coast to stop 4 ◎
Selection 7: Run pause
8: Fault reset (RESET)
DI4 Terminal
F5-04 Function 9: External fault normally open input 6 ◎
Selection 10: External fault normally closed
input
DI5 Terminal
F5-05 Function 11: Terminal UP 8 ◎
Selection 12: Terminal DOWN
13: UP/DOWN setting clear
(Terminal, keyboard)
14: Switching frequency source
15: Frequency source A switching
with preset frequency
16: Frequency source B switching
with preset frequency
17: MS reference terminal 1
HDI1 Terminal
Selection 20: MS reference terminal 4
21: Acceleration/deceleration time
selection terminal 1
22: Acceleration/deceleration time
selection terminal 2
23: PULSE frequency
(Only effective for HDI1)
24: Control command switch terminal
1
25: Control command switch terminal
- 52 -
2
26: Immediate DC braking
27: Deceleration DC braking
28: External stop terminal 1
(Only effective for keypad control)
29: External stop terminal 2
(According to the deceleration time 4)
30: Emergency stop
31: PID pause
32: PID integral pause
33: Reverse PID action direction
34: PID parameter switching
35: PLC pause
36: PLC state reset
37: Swing frequency pause
38: Swing frequency reset
39: Switching between speed control
and torque control
40: Torque control prohibit
41: Acceleration/deceleration prohibit
42: Reverse prohibit
43: Frequency modification prohibit
44: Counter input
45 Counter reset
46: Length count input
47: Length reset
48: Motor selection terminal
49: Reserved
50: User defined failure 1
51: User defined failure 2
52: Cleared the running time
53: Switching between two-line and
three-line mode
(Switch is invalid in running)
Unit’s digit: DI1

0: High level effective
1: Low level effective
DI1 Terminal
Ten’s digit: DI2, same as above
F5-10 Valid Mode 0x00000 ◎
Selection 1 Hundred’s digit: DI3, same as above
Thousand’s digit: DI4, same as above
Ten thousand’s digit: DI5, same as
above
- 53 -
Unit’s digit: HDI1

DI1 Terminal Valid 1: Low level effective
F5-11 0x0000 ◎
Mode Selection 2 Ten’s digit: reserved
Hundred’s digit: reserved
Thousand’s digit: reserved
F5-12 DI Filter Time 0.000s~1.000s 0.010s ○
DI1 Close Delay

F5-13 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ◎
Time
DI2 Close Delay

F5-14 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ◎
Time
DI3 Close Delay

F5-15 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ◎
Time
DI1 Open Delay

F5-16 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ◎
Time
DI2 Open Delay
F5-17 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ◎
Time
DI3 Open Delay

F5-18 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ◎
Time
Terminal
F5-19 UP/DOWN 0.001Hz/s~65.535Hz/s 1.000Hz/s ○
Change Rate
Unit’s digit: AI1 curve selection

1: Curve 1 (2 point, see F5-22~F5-26)
F5-20 AI Curve Selection 4: Curve 4 (4 point, see b2~00-b2-07) 0x321 ○
5: Curve 5 (4 point, see b2-08~b2-15)
Ten’s digit: AI2 curve selection, same
as above
Unit’s digit: AI1 is lower than min input

setting selection
0: Corresponding to the min input
AI is Lower than setting
F5-21 Min Input Setting 0X000 ○
1: 0.0%
Selection
Ten’s digit: AI2 is lower than min input
setting selection, same as above
AI Curve 1 Min
F5-22 -10.00V~F5-24 0.00V ○
Input
- 54 -
Corresponding
F5-23 Setting of AI Curve -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○
1 Min Input
AI Curve 1 Max
F5-24 F5-22~+10.00V 10.00V ○
Input
Corresponding
1 Max Input
F5-26 AI1 Filter Time 0.00s~10.00s 0.10s ○
AI Curve 2 Min
F5-27 -10.00V~F5-29 0.00V ○
Input
Corresponding
2 Min Input
AI Curve 2 Max
F5-29 F5-27~+10.00V 10.00V ○
Input
Corresponding
2 Max Input
AI Curve 3 Min
F5-32 -10.00V~F5-34 0.00V ○
Input
Corresponding
3 Min Input
AI Curve 3 Max
F5-34 F5-32~+10.00V 10.00V ○
Input
Corresponding
3 Max Input
F5-37 Pulse Min Input 0.00kHz~F5-39 0.00kHz ○
Corresponding
F5-38 Setting of Pulse -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○
Min Input
F5-39 Pulse Max Input F5-37~100.00kHz 50.00kHz ○
Corresponding
F5-40 Setting of Pulse -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○
Max Input
F5-41 PULSE Filter Time 0.00s~10.00s 0.10s ○
Travel Switch Lock

F5-42 0.00s~10.00s 1.00s ○
Time
- 55 -
F6 Output Terminal
Factory
Function Parameter
Setting Range Default Property
Code Name
Value
HDO1
Terminals 0: Pulse output
F6-00 0 ○
Output Mode 1: Switch signal output
Selection
HDO1 Output 0: No output

Terminals 1: Inverter in running
F6-01 0 ○
Function
Selection 2: Ready for run
3: Fault output 1 (fault stop)
Relay T1
F6-02 Function 4: Fault output 2 (don’t output 0 ○
Selection undervoltage)
5: Warning output (continue to run)
Relay T2
F6-03 Function 6: Output undervoltage 0 ○
Selection 7: Frequency level detection FDT1
output
8: Frequency level detection FDT2
output
9: Frequency reached
10: Frequency 1 reached output
11: Frequency 2 reached output
12: Zero speed running 1
(no output when stop)
13: Zero speed running 2
(output when stop)
14: Frequency upper limit reached
15: Frequency lower limit reached
(about running)
DO1 Output 16: Frequency lower limit reached
Terminal (output when stop)
F6-04 0 ○
Function
Selection 17: Current 1 reached output
18: Current 2 reached output
19: Zero current state
20: Output current limit exceeded
21: Motor overload pre-alarm
22: Inverter overload pre-alarm
23: During the load
24: Set Count value reached
25: Designated count value reached
26: Length reached
27: Module temperature reached
28: Reserved
29: Current running time reached
- 56 -
30: Accumulative running time

reached
31: Accumulative power-on time
reached
32: Timing reached output
33: PLC circulation output
34: Frequency limit
35: Torque limit
36: Reverse running
37: AI1 input limit
38: AI1>AI2
40: Reserved
41: Timing braking (power on braking)
42: Inverter in running (jog no output)
Unit’s digit: HDO1

0: Positive logic
1: Anti-logic
DO Output
Ten’s digit: RELAY1, same as above
Terminal
F6-06 Hundred’s digit: RELAY 2, same as 0x00000 ○
Effective State
Selection above
Thousand’s digit: DO1, same as
above
Ten thousand’s digit: reserved
HDO1 Closing
F6-07 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
T1 Closing
F6-08 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
T2 Closing
F6-09 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
DO1 Closing
F6-10 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
DO5 Closing
F6-11 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
HDO1 Output 0: Running frequency

F6-12 Function 1: Setting frequency 0 ○
Selection
2: Output current
AO1 Output (2 times of rated motor current)
F6-13 Function 0 ○
Selection 3: Output torque
4: Output power
5: Output voltage
AO2 Output
F6-14 Function 6: PULSE input 1 ○
Selection (100% corresponding 100.0kHz)
7: AI1
- 57 -
8: AI2
9: Reserved
10: Length
11: Count value
13: Motor rotate speed
14: Output current
(when≤55kW, 100.0% corresponding
100.00A; when>55kW, 100.0%
corresponding 1000.00A)
15: Output voltage
(100.0% corresponding 1000.00A)
16: Reserved
HDO1 Output
F6-15 0.01kHz~100.00kHz 50.00kHz ○
Max Frequency
AO1 Output
F6-16 Voltage Lower 0.00V~10.00V 0.00V ○
Limit
Corresponding
Setting Value of
F6-17 AO1 Output 0.0%~F6-19 0.0% ○
Voltage Lower
Limit
AO1 Output
F6-18 Voltage Upper 0.00V~10.00V 10.00V ○
Limit
Corresponding
Setting Value of
F6-19 AO1 Output F6-17~100.0% 100.0% ○
Voltage Upper
Limit
AO1 Output
F6-20 0.00s~10.00s 0.00s ○
Filter Time
AO2 Output
F6-21 Voltage Lower 0.00V~10.00V 0.00V ○
Limit
Corresponding
Setting Value of
F6-22 AO2 Output 0.0%~F6-24 0.0% ○
Voltage Lower
Limit
AO2 Output
F6-23 Voltage Upper 0.00V~10.00V 10.00V ○
Limit
Corresponding
F6-24 Setting Value of F6-22~100.0% 100.0% ○
AO2 Output
Voltage Upper
- 58 -
Limit
AO2 Output
F6-25 0.00s~10.00s 0.00s ○
Filter Time
AO1 Output 0: Voltage

F6-26 0 ○
Mode 1: Current
AO2 Output 0: Voltage

F6-27 0 ○
Mode 1: Current
HDO1
F6-28 Disconnect 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
T1 Disconnect
F6-29 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
T2 Disconnect
F6-30 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
DO1 Disconnect
F6-31 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
DO5 Disconnect
F6-32 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
F7 AIAO Keyboard and Display
Factory
Function Parameter
Code Name
Value
0: Invalid
1: Operation panel command channel
and switching with remote command
channel (terminal command channel
JOG / REV Key
or communication command channel)
Selection 2: FWD/REV switching
3: Forward jog
4: Reverse jog
5: Rapid debugging
0: STOP/RES key stop function is

STOP/RESET valid only in keypad operation mode
F7-01 1 ○
Key Function 1: STOP/RES key stop function all
valid in any operation mode
0000~0xFFFF
Bit00: Running frequency (Hz)
Bit01: Setting frequency (Hz)
LED Running Bit02: Bus voltage (V)
F7-02 Display 0x001F ○
Parameter 1 Bit03: Output voltage (V)
Bit04: Output current (A)
Bit05: Output power (kW)
Bit06: Output torque (%)
- 59 -
Bit07: DI input state

Bit08: DO output state
Bit09: AI1 voltage (V)
Bit11: Reserved
Bit12: Count value
Bit13: Length value
Bit14: Load speed display
BIT15: PID setting
0000~0xFFFF
Bit00: PID feedback
Bit01: PLC stage
Bit02: PULSE input frequency (kHz)
Bit03: Running frequency 2 (Hz)
Bit04: Set torque (0.%)
Bit05: Voltage before AI1 correction
(V)
Bit06: Voltage before AI2 correction
LED Running (V)
F7-03 Display 0x0000 ○
Bit07: Reserved
Parameter 2
Bit08: Line speed
Bit09: Current power on time (Hour)
Bit10: Current running time (Min)
Bit11: PULSE input frequency (Hz)
Bit12: Communication setting value
Bit13: Reserved
Bit14: Main frequency X display (Hz)
Bit15: Auxiliary frequency Y display
(Hz)
0000~0x3FFF
Bit00: Set frequency (Hz)
Bit01: Bus voltage (V)
LED Display
F7-04 Bit06: Reserved 0x0033 ○
Stop Parameter
Bit07: Count value
Bit08: Length value
Bit09: PLC stage
Bit10: Load speed
Bit11: PID setting
Bit12: Pulse input frequency (kHz)
Bit13: Set torque (0.1%)
- 60 -
The Second 0~15 corresponding bit0~bit15 of

Line LED F7-03
F7-05 4 ○
Running Display 16~31 corresponding bit0~bit15 of
Parameters F7-04
The Second
Line LED Stop 0~13 corresponding bit0~bit13 of
F7-06 1 ○
Display F7-05
Parameters
Load Speed
F7-07 Display 0.000s~6.5000 1.0000 ○
Coefficient
0: 0 bit decimal place

Load Speed 1: 1 bit decimal place
F7-08 Display Decimal 1 ○
Places 2: 2 bit decimal place
F8 Protection Parameters
Factory
Function Parameter
Code Name
Value
Motor 1
Overload 0: Disabled
F8-00 1 ○
Protection 1 : Enabled
Selection
Motor 1
F8-01 Overload 0.20~10.00 1.00 ○
Protection Gain
Motor 1
Overload
F8-02 50%~100% 80% ○
Warning
Coefficient
Motor 2
Overload 0: Disabled
F8-03 1 ○
Protection 1: Enabled
Selection
Motor 2
F8-04 Overload 0.20~10.00 1.00 ○
Protection Gain
Motor 2
Overload
F8-05 50%~100% 80% ○
Pre-alarm
Coefficient
Overvoltage ≤11kW: 1
/over current 0: Mode 0
F8-06 ◎
Stall Mode 1: Mode 1 >11kW: 0
Selection
Overvoltage 0: Disabled
F8-07 10 ○
Stall Proportion 1~100
- 61 -
Gain
Overvoltage
F8-08 Stall Integral 0~100 5 ○
Gain
Overvoltage 380VAC: 700.0VDC

F8-09 Stall Protection 100.0VDC~800.0VDC ○
voltage 220VAC: 370.0VDC
Over current 0: Disabled

F8-10 Stall Proportion 20 ○
Gain 1~1000
Over current
F8-11 Stall Integral 0~1000 20 ○
Gain
Over current
F8-12 Stall Protection 100%~200% 160% ○
Current
Quick Start Over

current
F8-13 0~100 30 ○
Suppression
Gain
Short-circuit to 0: Invalid
F8-14 Ground Upon 1 ○
Power-on 1: Valid
Input Phase 0: Disabled

F8-15 Loss Protection 1 ○
Output Phase 0: Disabled

F8-16 Loss Protection 1 ○
Offload 0: Invalid
F8-17 Protection 0 ○
Selection 1: Valid
Offload
F8-18 0.0~100.0% 10.0% ○
Detection Level
Offload
F8-19 0.0s~60.0s 1.0s ○
Detection Time
Action Selection 0: Invalid

Upon
F8-24 1: Decelerate 0 ○
Instantaneous
Power Failure 2: Decelerate to stop
Voltage Restore
Judgment Value
F8-25 Upon F0-10~100.0% 90.0% ○
Instantaneous
Power Failure
Voltage Restore
F8-26 Judgment Time 0.00s~100.00s 0.50s ○
Upon
- 62 -
Instantaneous
Power Failure
Voltage
Judgment Value
60.0%~100.0% (Standard bus
F8-27 Upon 80.0% ○
voltage)
Instantaneous
Power Failure
Maximum
Change of V/F 0: No limit
F8-28 800 ○
Over Voltage 1~30000
Stall
F9 Fault Record and Setting
Factory
Function Parameter
Code Name
Value
Fault Types for 0: No fault

F9-00 - ●
the First Time 1: Acceleration over current
Fault Types for (hardware)
F9-01 the Second 2: Deceleration over current - ●
Time (hardware)
3: Constant speed over current
(hardware)
4: Acceleration over current (software)
5: Deceleration over current
(software)
6: Constant speed over current
(software)
7: Acceleration overvoltage
8: Deceleration overvoltage
9: Constant speed overvoltage
10: Under voltage
11: Motor overload
Fault Types for 12: Inverter overload

F9-02 the Third Time 13: Input phase loss - ●
(Last Time) 14: Output phase loss
15: Module overheat
16: Reserved
17: External fault
18: Communication abnormal
19: Current detection abnormal
20: Motor tune abnormal
21: EEPROM read-write fault
22: Disconnection detection fault
23: PID feedback lost at runtime
24: Motor short circuit to ground
25: Reserved
- 63 -
26: Reserved
27: Running time reached
28: Power-on time reached
29: Buffer resistance overheart
30~34: Reserved
35: User-defined fault 1
36: User-defined fault 2
37: Offload
38: Fast current-limiting timeout
39: Switch motor in running
40~42: Reserved
43: Manufacturer defined fault
Frequency
Upon the Third
F9-03 - - ●
Time (Last
Time) Fault
Current Upon
the Third Time
F9-04 - - ●
(Last Time)
Fault
Bus Voltage
Upon the Third
F9-05 - - ●
Time (Last
Time) Fault
Input Terminal
State Upon the
F9-06 - - ●
Third Time (Last
Time) Fault
Output Terminal
State Upon the
F9-07 - - ●
Third Time (Last
Time) Fault
Inverter State
Upon the Third
F9-08 - - ●
Time (Last
Time) Fault
Power on Time
Upon the Third
F9-09 - - ●
Time (Last
Time) Fault
Running Time
F9-10 Upon the Third - - ●
Time Fault
Frequency
Upon the
F9-13 - - ●
Second Time
Fault
- 64 -
Current Upon
F9-14 the Second - - ●
Time Fault
Bus Voltage
Upon the
F9-15 - - ●
Second Time
Fault
Input Terminal
State Upon the
F9-16 - - ●
Second Time
Fault
Output Terminal
State Upon the
F9-17 - - ●
Second Time
Fault
Inverter State
Upon the
F9-18 - - ●
Second Time
Fault
Power on Time
Upon the
F9-19 - - ●
Second Time
Fault
Running Time
Upon the
F9-20 - - ●
Second Time
Fault
Frequency
F9-23 Upon the First - - ●
Time Fault
Current Upon
F9-24 the First Time - - ●
Fault
Bus Voltage
F9-25 Upon the First - ●
Time Fault
Input Terminal
F9-26 State Upon the - ●
First Time Fault
Output Terminal
F9-27 State Upon the - - ●
First Time Fault
Inverter State
Time Fault
Power on Time
Time Fault
- 65 -
Running Time
Time Fault
Fault Automatic
F9-33 0~20 0 ○
Reset Times
Fault Automatic
F9-34 Reset Interval 0.1s~100.0s 1.0s ○
Time
Fault DO Action
Selection 0: No action
F9-35 During the Fault 0 ○
Automatic 1: Action
Reset
Unit’s digit: motor overload (11)

0: Coast to stop
1: Stop according to stop mode
2: Continue to run
Ten’s digit: input phase loss (13)
0: Coast to stop
2: Continue to run
Hundred’s digit: output phase loss
(14)
Fault Protection 0: Coast to stop
F9-36 Action Selection 0x00000 ○
1 1: Stop according to stop mode
2: Continue to run
Thousand’s digit: external fault (17)
0: Coast to stop
2: Continue to run
Ten thousand’s digit: communication
abnormal (18)
0: Coast to stop
2: Continue to run
Unit’s digit: reserved

Ten’s digit: parameter read-write
abnormal (21)
0: Coast to stop
Fault Protection 1: Stop according to stop mode
2 2: Continue to run
Hundred’s digit: running time reached
(27)
0: Coast to stop
- 66 -
2: Continue to run
Unit’s digit: user-defined fault 1 (35)

0: Coast to stop
2: Continue to run
Ten’s digit: user-defined fault 2 (36)
0: Coast to stop
2: Continue to run
Hundred’s digit: power on time
reached (28)
0: Coast to stop
Fault Protection 1: Stop according to stop mode
2: Continue to run
3
Thousand’s digit: offload (37)
0: Coast to stop
2: Decelerate to 7% of the rated motor
frequency continue running,
automatically restored to the set
frequency operation when no offload
Ten thousand’s digit: PID feedback
lost when running (23)
0: Coast to stop
2: Continue to run
Unit’s digit: Disconnection detection

fault (22)
0: Coast to stop
Fault Protection
F9-39 Action Selection 2: Continue to run 0x00000 ○
4 Ten’s digit: reserved
0: Run to the current running

Continue frequency
Running 1: Run at set frequency
F9-40 Frequency 0 ○
2: Run at frequency upper limit
Selection at
Failure 3: Run at frequency lower limit
4: Run at abnormal standby frequency
- 67 -
Abnormal 60.0%~100.0%
F9-41 Standby (100.0% corresponding max 100.0% ○
Frequency frequency F0-10)
FA Process PID
Factory
Function Parameter
Code Name
Value
0: FA-01 setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
PID Given 3: Reserved
FA-00 0 ○
Source 4: PULSE setting
6: Multi-reference setting
PID Digital
FA-01 0.0%~100.0% 50.0% ○
Giving
0: A1
1: AI2
2: Reserved
3: AI1-AI2
PID Feedback
FA-02 4: PULSE setting 0 ○
Source
6: AI1+AI2
7: MAX (IAI1I, IAI2I)
8: MIN (IAI1I, IAI2I)
PID Action 0: Positive action

FA-03 0 ○
Direction 1: Anti-action
PID Given
FA-04 Feedback 0~65535 1000 ○
Range
Proportion Gain
FA-05 0.0~100.0 20.0 ○
Kp1
Integral Time
FA-06 0.01s~10.00s 2.00s ○
Ti1
Differential Time
FA-07 0.000s~10.000s 0.000s ○
Td1
PID Reverse
FA-08 Cut-off 0.00~max frequency 0.00Hz ○
Frequency
PID Deviation
FA-09 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
Limit
- 68 -
PID Differential
FA-10 0.00%~100.00% 0.10% ○
Limiting
PID Given
FA-11 0.00s~650.00s 0.00s ○
Change Time
PID Feedback
FA-12 0.00s~60.00s 0.00s ○
Filter Time
PID Output
FA-13 0.00s~60.00s 0.00s ○
Filter Time
Proportion Gain
FA-15 0.0~100.0 20.0 ○
Kp2
Integral Time
FA-16 0.01s~10.00s 2.00s ○
Ti2
Differential Time
FA-17 0.000s~10.000s 0.000s ○
Td2
0: No switching
PID Parameters
1: Switching through DI terminal
FA-18 Switching 0 ○
Condition 2: Automatic switching according to
the deviation
PID Parameters
FA-19 Switching 0.0%~FA-20 20.0% ○
Deviation 1
PID Parameters
FA-20 Switching A2-19~100.0% 80.0% ○
Deviation 2
FA-21 PID Initial Value 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
PID Initial Value

FA-22 0.00s~650.00s 0.00s ○
Hold Time
Twice Output
Deviation
FA-23 0.00%~100.00% 1.00% ○
Positive
Maximum Value
Twice Output
Deviation
FA-24 0.00%~100.00% 1.00% ○
Reverse
Maximum Value
Unit’s digit: integral separation

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
PID Integral
FA-25 Ten’s digit: whether stop integral after 0x00 ○
Property
output the limit
0: Continue integral
1: Stop integral
PID Feedback 0.0%: Don’t judge feedback lost

FA-26 0.0% ○
Lost Detection 0.1%~100.0%
- 69 -
Value
PID Feedback
FA-27 Lost Detection 0.0s~20.0s 0.0s ○
Time
PID Feedback
Lost Detection
FA-28 0.00Hz~max frequency 10.00Hz ○
Starting
Frequency
PID Stop 0: No operation when stop

FA-29 0 ○
Operation 1: Operation when stop
The Lower Limit

Value of 0.0%: No limit
FA-30 0.0.% ○
Feedback when 0.1%~100.0%
PID Action
Fb Enhance Function Group

Factory
Function
Code
Value
Jog Running
Fb-00 0.00Hz~max frequency 5.00Hz ○
Frequency
Jog Acceleration Model

Fb-01 0.0s~6500.0s ○
Time dependent
Jog Deceleration Model

Fb-02 0.0s~6500.0s ○
Time dependent

Fb-03 0.0s~6500.0s ○
2 dependent
Deceleration Model
Fb-04 0.0s~6500.0s ○
Time 2 dependent
Fb-05 0.0s~6500.0s ○
3 dependent
Deceleration Model
Fb-06 0.0s~6500.0s ○
Time 3 dependent

Fb-07 0.0s~6500.0s ○
4 dependent
Deceleration Model
Fb-08 0.0s~6500.0s ○
Time 4 dependent
Emergency Stop
Fb-09 0.0s~6500.0s 10.0s ○
Time
Acceleration Time
1 and time 2
Switching
Frequency Point
Fb-11 Deceleration 0.00Hz~max frequency 0.00Hz ○
- 70 -
Time 1 and time 2

Switching
Frequency Point
Hopping
Frequency 1
Hopping
Frequency 2
Hopping
Frequency Range
Hopping
Frequency
Whether Valid in 0: Disabled
Fb-15 0 ○
the Process of 1: Enabled
Acceleration and
Deceleration
Frequency
Fb-16 Detection Value 0.00Hz~max frequency 50.00Hz ○
(FDT1)
Frequency
Fb-17 Detection Lagged 0.0%~100.0% (FDT1 electrical level ) 5.0% ○
Value (FDTI)
Frequency
Fb-18 Detection Value 0.00Hz~max frequency 50.00Hz ○
(FDT2)
Frequency
Fb-19 Detection Lagged 0.0%~100.0% (FDT2 electrical level ) 5.0% ○
Value (FDT2)
Frequency
Reached
Fb-20 0.0%~100.0% (max frequency) 0.0% ○
Detection
Amplitude
Any Frequency
Fb-21 Reaching 0.00Hz~max frequency 50.00Hz ○
Detection Value 1
Any Frequency
Reaching
Fb-22 0.0%~100.0% (max frequency) 0.0% ○
Detection
Amplitude 1
Any Frequency
Fb-23 Reaching 0.00Hz~max frequency 50.00Hz ○
Detection Value 2
Any Frequency
Reaching
Fb-24 0.0%~100.0% (max frequency) 0.0% ○
Detection
Amplitude 2
Fb-25 Zero Current 0.0%~300.0% 5.0% ○
- 71 -
Detection Levels 100.0% corresponding rated motor

current
Zero Current
Fb-26 Detection Delay 0.01s~600.00s 0.10s ○
Time
Output Current 0.0% (no detection)

Fb-27 200.0% ○
Limit Exceed 0.1%~300.0% (rated motor current)
Output Current
Limit Exceed
Fb-28 0.00s~600.00s 0.00s ○
Detection Delay
Time
Any Current
Fb-29 0.0%~300.0% (rated motor current) 100.0% ○
Reaching 1
Any Current
Fb-30 Reaching 1 0.0%~300.0% (rated motor current) 0.0% ○
Amplitude
Any Current
Reaching 2
Any Current
Fb-32 Reaching 2 0.0%~300.0% (rated motor current) 0.0% ○
Amplitude
The Running
Fb-33 Reached Time 0.0Min~6500.0Min 0.0Min ○
Setting
Accumulative
Power-on
Fb-34 0h~65535h 0h ○
Reached Time
Setting
Accumulative
Fb-35 Running Reached 0h~65535h 0h ○
Time Setting
Timing Function 0: Disabled

Fb-36 0 ○
0: Fb-38 setting
1: AI1
Timed Running 2: AI2
Fb-37 0 ○
Time Selection 3: Reserved
Analog input range corresponding to
the Fb-38
Timed Running
Fb-38 0.0Min~65000.0Min 0.0Min ○
Function
Module
Fb-39 Temperature 0°C~100°C 75°C ○
Reached
Fb-40 Lower Limit of AI1 0.00V~Fb-41 3.10V ○

Input Voltage
- 72 -
Protection Value
Upper Limit of AI1

Fb-41 Input Voltage Fb-40~10.00V 6.80V ○
Protection Value
Wakeup Dormancy frequency (Fb-44)~max

Fb-42 0.00Hz ○
Frequency frequency (F0-10)
Wakeup Delay
Fb-43 0.0s~6500.0s 0.0s ○
Time
Dormancy
Fb-44 0.00Hz~wakeup frequency (Fb-42) 0.00Hz ○
Frequency
Dormancy Delay
Fb-45 0.0s~6500.0s 0.0s ○
Time
Timing Braking
Fb-48 0.00Hz~50.00Hz 1.50Hz ○
Frequency
Timing Braking
Fb-49 0.0s~60.0s 2.0s ○
Time
Terminal Jog 0: Disabled

Fb-50 1 ○
Priority 1: Enabled
Swing Frequency 0: Relative to center frequency

Fb-51 0 ○
Setting Method 1: Relative to max frequency
Swing Frequency
Fb-52 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
Amplitude
Jumping
Fb-53 Frequency 0.0%~50.0% 0.0% ○
Amplitude
Swing Frequency
Fb-54 0.1s~3000.0s 10.0s ○
Cycle
Triangular Wave
of Swing
Fb-55 0.1%~100.0% 50.0% ○
Frequency Rise
Time
Fb-56 Set Length 0m~65535m 1000m ○
Fb-57 Actual Length 0m~65535m 0m ○
Number of Pulse
Fb-58 0.1~6553.5 100.0 ○
per Meter
Fb-59 Set Count Value 1~65535 1000 ○
Designated Count
Fb-60 1~65535 1000 ○
Value
FC Multi-reference and Simple PLC
Factory
Function
Code
Value
- 73 -
FC-00 Multi-reference 0 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
Multi-reference
FC-10 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
10
Multi-reference
FC-12 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
12
Multi-reference
FC-13 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
13
Multi-reference
FC-14 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
14
Multi-reference
FC-15 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
15
0: Stop when single run end

Simple PLC Run 1: Keep the final value when single
FC-16 0 ○
Mode run end
2: Always circulation
Unit’s digit: power failure retentive

selection
Simple PLC 0: Non-retentive at power failure
Power Failure 1: Retentive at power failure
FC-17 0x00 ○
Retentive
Selection Ten’s digit: stop retentive selection
0: Non-retentive at stop
1: Retentive at stop
Run Time of
FC-18 Simple PLC 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 0
Acceleration /
Deceleration
FC-19 Time Selection of 0~3 0 ○
Simple PLC
Reference 0
- 74 -
Run Time of
Reference 1
Acceleration /
Deceleration
Simple PLC
Reference 1
Run Time of
Reference 2
Acceleration /
Deceleration
Simple PLC
Reference 2
Run Time of
Reference 3
Acceleration /
Deceleration
Simple PLC
Reference 3
Run Time of
Reference 4
Acceleration /
Deceleration
Simple PLC
Reference 4
Run Time of
Reference 5
Acceleration /
Deceleration
Simple PLC
Reference 5
Run Time of
Reference 6
Acceleration /
Deceleration
Simple PLC
Reference 6
- 75 -
Run Time of
Reference 7
Acceleration /
Deceleration
Simple PLC
Reference 7
Run Time of
Reference 8
Acceleration /
Deceleration
Simple PLC
Reference 8
Run Time of
Reference 9
Acceleration /
Deceleration
Simple PLC
Reference 9
Run Time of
Reference 10
Acceleration /
Deceleration
Simple PLC
Reference 10
Run Time of
Reference 11
Acceleration /
Deceleration
Simple PLC
Reference 11
Run Time of
Reference 12
Acceleration /
Deceleration
Simple PLC
Reference 12
FC-44 Run Time of 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○

Simple PLC
- 76 -
Reference 13
Acceleration /
Deceleration
Simple PLC
Reference 13
Run Time of
Reference 14
Acceleration /
Deceleration
Simple PLC
Reference 14
Run Time of
Reference 15
Acceleration /
Deceleration
Simple PLC
Reference 15
Simple PLC Run 0: s

FC-50 0 ○
Time Unit 1: h
0: Coding FC-00 given

1: AI1
2: AI2
3: Reserved
Multi-reference 0
FC-51 4: PULSE 0 ○
Setting Method
5: PID
6: Preset frequency(F0-09)given,
UP/DOWN can modify
MS Speed
Acceleration/Dec 0: Function code confirm
FC-52 0 ○
eleration Time 1: Terminal confirm
Selection Mode
Fd MODBUS Communication
Factory
Function
Code
Value
0: 300BPS
1: 600BPS
Fd-00 Baud Rate 5 ○
2: 1200BPS
3: 2400BPS
- 77 -
4: 4800BPS
5: 9600BPS
6: 19200BPS
7: 38400BPS
8: 57600BPS
9: 115200BPS
0: No verify(8-N-2)
1: Even verify(8-E-1)
Fd-01 Data Format 0 ○
2: Odd verify(8-O-1)
3: No verify (8-N-1)
0: is broadcast address
Fd-02 Local Address 1 ○
1~247: slave address
Fd-03 Response Delay 0ms~20ms 2ms ○
Communication
Fd-04 0.0 (disabled), 0.1s~60.0s 0.0s ○
Timeout Time
Data Transfer 0: Non standard MODBUS protocol

Fd-05 1 ○
Format Selection 1: Standard MODBUS protocol
Communication 0: 0.01A
Fd-06 Read Current 0 ○
Resolution 1: 0.1A
FF User Parameters Group
Function Factory
Code Value
FF-00 User Password 0:~65535 0 ○
0: No operation
1: Restore factory default setup
Parameter value, exclude of motor parameter
FF-01 0 ◎
Initialization 2: Clear the record information
3: Backup user current parameters
4: Restore user current parameters
Unit’s digit:
0: Not display A group
Function Code 1: Display A group
FF-03 0x11 ○
Display Selection Ten’s digit:
0: Not display b group
1: Display b group
Function Code 0: Can modify

FF-04 0 ○
Modify Property 1: Can’t modify
FF-05 Fast Debugging Unit’s digit: user custom parameter 0x10 ○
- 78 -
Setting group display selection

0: Not display
1: Display
Ten’s digit: user change parameter
group display selection
0: Not display
1: Display
Factory
FF-06 Product Code 0~65535 ●
Setting
Software Factory
FF-07 1.00~10.00 ●
Versioning Setting
Factory
FF-08 Inverter Model ●
Setting
Date of
Factory
FF-09 Production 0~9999 ●
Setting
(Year/Month)
Date of Factory
FF-10 0~31 ●
Production (Date) Setting
Inverter Module
FF-11 Radiator 0°C~120°C 0 ●
Temperature
Accumulative
FF-13 Power 0°C~65535°C 0°C ●
Consumption
Accumulative
FF-14 0h~65535h 0h ●
Runing Time
Accumulative
FF-15 0h~65535h 0h ●
Power-on Time
Time Lock
FF-16 0h~65535h 0h ☆
Password
Time Lock Time

FF-17 0h~65535h 0h ☆
setting
Time Lock
FF-18 0h~65535h 0h ☆
Elapsed Time
A0 Motor 1 Torque Control .
Factory
Function
Code
Value
Speed/Torque 0: Speed control

A0-00 Control Mode 0 ◎
Selection 1: Torque control
Torque Setting 0: Digital setting (A0-02)

Source Selection
A0-01 1: AI1 0 ◎
under the Torque
Control Mode 2: AI2
- 79 -
3: Reserved
4: PULSE
6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
7: MAX (AI1, AI2)
8: Keypad Potentiometer (the full
scale of option 1~7 corresponding
digital setting of A0-02)
Torque Digital
Setting under the
A0-02 -200.0%~2000% 100.0% ○
Torque Control
Mode
0: Digital setting (A0-04)

1: AI1
Max Frequency 2: AI2
Source Selection
A0-03 3: Reserved 0 ◎
under the Torque
Control Forward 4: PULSE
Max Frequency
Digital Setting
A0-04 0.00Hz~max frequency 50.00Hz ○
under the Torque
Control Forward

1: AI1
Max Frequency 2: AI2
Source Selection
under the Torque
Control Reverse 4: PULSE
Max Frequency
Digital Setting
under the Torque
Control Reverse
Torque Control
A0-07 0.00s~650.00s 0.00s ○
Acceleration Time
Torque Control
A0-08 0.00s~650.00s 0.00s ○
deceleration Time
Starting Torque
A0-09 0.0%~100.0% 10.0% ○
Setting
Excitation Current
Coefficient under
A0-10 the Torque 20.0%~150.0% 100.0% ○
Control (only
effective to SVC)
- 80 -
Low Frequency
Torque
A0-11 0.0%~50.0% 0.0% ○
Compensation
Amount
Low Frequency
Torque
A0-12 Compensation 0.00Hz~Max frequency 10.00Hz ○
Frequency Upper
Limit
High Frequency
Torque
A0-13 0.0%~50.0% 3.0% ○
Compensation
Amount
High Frequency
Torque
Frequency Lower
Limit
Rotational Inertia 0: Internal frequency

A0-15 Compensation 1: Feedforward frequency variation 1 ◎
Reference 2: Feedforward frequency
0: AI1
Feedforward 1: AI2
A0-16 Frequency 2: Reserved 0 ◎
Source Selection 3: PULSE
Rotational Inertia
A0-17 Compensation 0.00~10.00 0.00 ○
Coefficient
Rotational Inertia
A0-18 Compensation 0.0%~50.0% 5.0% ○
Upper Limit
Rotational Inertia
Compensation
Starting
Frequency
Lowest
Resolution 0.00: Not limit
A0-20 1.00Hz ○
Frequency (only 0.01Hz~2.00Hz
effective to SVC)
Disconnection 0.0: Disconnection is invalid

A0-21 0.0 ○
Detection Time 0.1~60.0s
A1 Optimize Control Parameter
Function Factory
Code Value
- 81 -
Carrier Model
A1-00 0.5kHz~16.0kHz ○
Frequency dependent
Carrier
Frequency 0: No
A1-01 1 ○
Adjustment with 1: Yes
the Temperature
DPWM Switching
A1-02 Frequency Upper 0.00Hz~15.00Hz 12.00Hz ○
Limit
LED unit’s digit:

0: Asynchronous modulation
1: Synchronous modulation
PWM Modulation
A1-03 LED ten’s digit: 0x00 ◎
Mode
0: Two phase and three phase
modulation
1: Three phase modulation
Dead Zone 0: Without compensation

A1-04 Compensation 1: Compensation 1 1 ○
Mode Selection 2: Compensation 2
0: Random PWM invalid

Random PWM
A1-05 1~10: PWM carrier frequency 0 ○
Depth
random depth
Rapid Current 0: Disabled

A1-06 1 ○
Limiting Enable 1: Enabled
Current Detection
A1-07 0~100 5 ○
Compensation
0: Not optimize
SVC Optimize
A1-08 1: Optimize 1 1 ○
Mode Selection
2: Optimize 2
Dead Zone Time

A1-09 100%~200% 150% ○
Adjustment
A1-10 Droop Control 0.00Hz~10.00Hz 0.00Hz ○
Cooling Fan 0: Fan operation in runtime

A1-11 0 ○
Control 1: Fan is always running
Speed
A1-12 Identification 0~8 4 ◎
Filter Depth
Low Frequency 0: Limit mode 1

A1-13 Carrier Limit 1: Limit mode 2 0 ○
Mode 2: Not Limit
A2 Motor 2 Parameters
- 82 -
Factory
Function
Code
Value
0: Common Asynchronous motor
Motor Type
A2-00 1: Frequency conversion 0 ◎
Selection
asynchronous motor
Rated Motor Model
A2-01 0.1Kw~1000.0kW ◎
Power dependent
Rated Motor Model

A2-02 1V~2000V ◎
Voltage dependent
0.01A~655.35A (Inverter
Rated Motor power≤55kW) Model
A2-03 ◎
Current 0.1A~6553.5A (Inverter dependent
power>55kW)
Rated Motor Model

A2-04 0.01Hz~max frequency ◎
Frequency dependent
Rated Motor Model

A2-05 1rpm~65535rpm ◎
Rotate Speed dependent
0.001Ω~65.535Ω (Inverter
Asynchronous power≤55kW) Tune
A2-06 Motor Stator ◎
0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω (Inverter parameter
Resistance
power>55kW)
0.001Ω~65.535Ω (Inverter
Asynchronous power≤55kW) Tune
A2-07 Motor Rotor ◎
0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω (Inverter parameter
Resistance
power>55kW)
Asynchronous 0.01mH~655.35mH (Inverter

Motor Leakage power≤55kW) Tune
A2-08 ◎
Inductive 0.001mH~65.535mH (Inverter parameter
Reactance power>55kW)
Asynchronous 0.1mH~6553.5mH (Inverter

Motor Interaction power≤55kW) Tune
A2-09 ◎
Inductive 0.01mH~655.35mH(Inverter parameter
Reactance power>55kW)
Asynchronous 0.01A~ A2-03 (Inverter power≤55kW) Tune

A2-10 Motor No-load ◎
0.1A~A2-03 (Inverter power>55kW) parameter
Current
0: No operation
1: Asynchronous motor static tuning
A2-26 Tuning Selection 0 ◎
2: Asynchronous motor complete
tuning
A3 Motor 2 Vector Control Parameters
Factory
Function
Code
Value
- 83 -
Speed Loop
A3-00 1~100 30 ○
Proportion Gain 1
Speed Loop
A3-01 0.01s~10.00s 0.50s ○
Integral Time 1
Switching
A3-02 0.00Hz~A6-05 5.00Hz ○
Frequency 1
Speed Loop
A3-03 1~100 20 ○
Proportion Gain 2
Speed Loop
A3-04 0.01s~10.00s 1.00s ○
Integral Time 2
Switching
A3-05 A6-02~max frequency 10.00Hz ○
Frequency 2
Vector Control
A3-06 20%~200% 100% ○
Slip Gain
Speed Loop Filter

A3-07 0.000s~0.100s 0.000s ○
Time Constant

1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Motor Torque
4: PULSE setting
A3-09 Upper Limit 0 ○
6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
7: MAX (AI1, AI2)
Digital Setting for

A3-10 Motor Torque 0%~200.0% 150.0% ○
Upper Limit

1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Brake Torque
4: PULSE setting
A3-11 Upper Limit 0 ○
6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
7: MAX (AI1, AI2)
Digital Setting for

A3-12 Brake Torque 0%~200.0% 150.0% ○
Upper Limit
A3-13 Excitation 0~60000 2000 ○

Regulation
- 84 -
Proportion Gain
Excitation
A3-14 Regulation 0~60000 1300 ○
Integral Gain
Torque
A3-15 Regulation 0~60000 2000 ○
Proportion Gain
Torque
A3-16 Regulation 0~60000 1300 ○
Integral Gain
Speed Loop Unit’s digit: Integral separation

A3-17 Proportion 0: Disabled 0 ○
Integral Property 1: Enabled
Max Weak
A3-20 1%~300% 50% ○
Magnetic Current
Weak Magnetic
A3-21 Automatic 10%~500% 100% ○
Adjustment Gain
Weak Magnetic
A3-22 2~10 2 ○
Integral Multiple
Torque Boost
A3-23 0.0%~60.0% 10.0% ○
Coefficient
Torque Boost
Cut-off Frequency
Exciting Current
A3-25 Compensation 0~500 0 ○
Gain
SVC Torque
Current
A3-26 0~500 0 ○
Compensation
Gain
Torque Response
A3-27 1~1000 10 ○
Gain
A4 Motor 2 V/F Control Parameters
Factory
Function
Code
Value

1: Multipoint V/F
2: Square V/F
A4-00 V/F Curve Setting 3: 1.2#power V/F 0 ◎
4: 1.4#power V/F
5: 1.6#power V/F
6: 1.8#power V/F
- 85 -
7: VF complete separation
8: VF half separation
Torque Boost 0: Automatic torque boost

A4-01 0 ◎
Mode Selection 1: Manual torque boost
Manual Torque Model

A4-02 0.0%~30.0% ○
Boost dependent
Manual Torque
A4-03 Boost Cutoff 0.00Hz~max frequency 50.00Hz ◎
Frequency
MS VF Frequency
A4-04 0.00Hz~A4-05 0.00Hz ◎
Point 1
MS VF Voltage
A4-05 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ◎
Point 1
MS VF Frequency
A4-06 A4-04~A4-07 0.00Hz ◎
Point 2
MS VF Voltage
A4-07 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ◎
Point 2
MS VF Frequency A4-05~Rated motor frequency

A4-08 0.00Hz ◎
Point 3 (A4-04)
MS VF Voltage
A4-09 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ◎
Point 3
VF Slip
A4-10 Compensation 0.0%~200.0% 20.0% ○
Gain
A4-11 0 ◎
Supression Mode 1: Mode 1
A4-12 0~100 ○
VF Maximum
Chang of
A4-13 0~1000 200 ○
Oscillation
Suppression

1: AI1
2: AI2
3: Reserve
4: PULSE setting
Voltage Source
A4-14 5: MS instruction 0 ○
for VF Separation
6: Simple PLC
7: PID
motor voltage
- 86 -
Voltage Digital
A4-15 Setting for VF 0V~rated motor voltage 0V ○
Separation
Voltage Rise 0.0s~1000.0s

A4-16 Time of VF Remark: Indication the time that 0V 5.0s ○
Separation rise to rated motor voltage
0.0s~1000.0s
Voltage Fall Time
A4-17 Remark: Indication the time that 5.0s ○
of VF Separation
rated motor voltage drop to 0V
b0 User Customize Function Code
Factory
Function
Code
Value
b0-00 User Code 0 F0-00 ○
b0-10 User Code 10 F5-03 ○
b0-11 User Code 11 F6-02 ○
b0-12 User Code 12 F6-03 ○
b0-13 User Code 13 FF-06 ○
- 87 -
b1 Virtual IO
Factory
Function
Code
Value
Virtual VDI1
b1-00 Terminal Function 0~59 0 ◎
Selection
Virtual VDI2
Selection
Virtual VDI3
Selection
Virtual VDI4
Selection
Virtual VDI5
Selection
Unit’s digit: virtual VDI1
0: By virtual VDOx state to decide
VDI is valid or not
1: By code b1-06 setting VDI is valid
or not
Virtual VDI Ten’s digit: virtual VDI2, same as
b1-05 Terminal State above 0x00000 ◎
Setting Mode Hundred’s digit: virtual VDI3, same
as above
Thousand’s digit: virtual VDI4, same
as above
Ten thousand’s digit: virtual VDI5,
same as above
- 88 -

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Ten’s digit: virtual VDI2, same as
Virtual VDI above
b1-06 Terminal state Hundred’s digit: virtual VDI3, same 0x00000 ◎
setting as above
Thousand’s digit: virtual VDI4, same
as above
Ten thousand’s digit: virtual VDI5,
same as above
Function
Selection when
b1-07 0~59 0 ◎
AI1 Terminal as
DI
Function
Selection when
b1-08 0~59 0 ◎
AI2 Terminal as
DI
Unit’s digit: AI1

Effective Mode 0: High electrical level enable
Selection when
b1-10 1: Low electrical level enable 0x000 ◎
AI1 Terminal as
DI Ten’s digit: AI2, same as above
0: Short circuit with physical DiX

Virtual VDO1 internal
b1-11 Output Function 0 ○
Selection 1~43: see the F6 group physical DO
output selection

output selection

output selection

output selection
VDO1 Closing
b1-16 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
VDO2 Closing
b1-17 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
VDO3 Closing
b1-18 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
- 89 -
VDO4 Closing
b1-19 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
VDO5 Closing
b1-20 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
Unit’s digit: VDO1

0: Positive logic
1: Anti-logic
VDO Output Ten’s digit: VDO2, same as above
b1-21 Terminal Effective Hundred’s digit: VDO3, same as 0x00000 ○
State Selection above
Thousand’s digit: VDO4, same as
above
VDO1
b1-22 Disconnection 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
VDO2
Delay
VDO3
Delay
VDO4
Delay
VDO5
Delay
b2 AI Curve Setting
Factory
Function
Code
Value
AI Curve 4 Min
b2-00 -10.00V~b2-02 0.00V ○
Input
Corresponding
b2-01 Setting of AI -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○
Curve 4 Min Input
AI Curve 4
b2-02 Inflection Point 1 b2-00~b2-04 3.00V ○
Input
- 90 -
Corresponding
Setting of AI
b2-03 Curve 4 -100.0%~+100.0% 30.0% ○
Inflection Point
1 Input
AI Curve 4
b2-04 Inflection Point b2-00~b2-06 6.00V ○
2 Input
Corresponding
Setting of AI
b2-05 Curve 4 -100.0%~+100.0% 60.0% ○
Inflection Point
2 Input
AI Curve 4 Max
b2-06 b2-06~+10.00V 10.00V ○
Input
Corresponding
Setting of AI
b2-07 -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○
Curve 4 Max
Input
AI Curve 5 Min
b2-08 -10.00V~b2-10 -10.00V ○
Input
Corresponding
Setting of AI
b2-09 -100.0%~+100.0% -100.0% ○
Curve 5 Min
Input
AI Curve 5
b2-10 Inflection Point b2-08~b2-12 -3.00V ○
1 Input
Corresponding
Setting of AI
b2-11 Curve 5 -100.0%~+100.0% -30.0% ○
Inflection Point
1 Input
AI Curve 5
b2-12 Inflection Point b2-10~b2-14 3.00V ○
2 Input
Corresponding
Setting of AI
b2-13 Curve 5 -100.0%~+100.0% 30.0% ○
Inflection Point
2 Input
AI Curve 5 Max
b2-14 b2-12~+10.00V 10.00V ○
Input
Corresponding
Setting of AI
b2-15 -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○
Curve 5 Max
Input
- 91 -
AI1 Setting
b2-16 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
Jump Point
AI1 Setting
b2-17 0.0%~100.0% 0.5% ○
Jump Range
AI2 Setting
b2-18 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
Jump Point
AI2 Setting
b2-19 0.0%~100.0% 0.5% ○
Jump Range
b3 AIAO Correction
Factory
Function Parameter
Code Name
Value
AI1 Measured Factory

b3-00 0.500V～4.000V ○
Voltage 1 Correction
AI1 Displayed Factory

b3-01 0.500V～4.000V ○

b3-02 6.000V～9.999V ○

b3-03 6.000V～9.999V ○
b3-04 0.500V～4.000V ○

b3-05 0.500V～4.000V ○

b3-06 6.000V～9.999V ○

b3-07 6.000V～9.999V ○

b3-08 0.500V～4.000V ○

b3-09 0.500V～4.000V ○

b3-10 6.000V～9.999V ○

b3-11 6.000V～9.999V ○
AO1 Target Factory

b3-12 0.500V～4.000V ○
AO1 Measured Factory

b3-13 0.500V～4.000V ○
AO1 Target Factory

b3-14 6.000V～9.999V ○
- 92 -

b3-15 6.000V～9.999V ○
Target Voltage 1 Factory

b3-16 0.500V～4.000V ○
Of AO2 Correction

b3-17 0.500V～4.000V ○
AO2 Target Factory

b3-18 6.000V～9.999V ○

b3-19 6.000V～9.999V ○
U0 Basic Monitoring Parameters

Factory
Function Parameter
Code Name
Value
Running
U0-00 0.01Hz ●
Frequency (Hz)
Setting
U0-01 0.01Hz ●
Frequency (Hz)
U0-02 Bus Voltage (V) 0.1V ●
Output Voltage
U0-03 1V ●
(V)
Output Current
U0-04 0.01A ●
(A)
Output Power
U0-05 0.1kW ●
(kW)
Output Torque
U0-06 0.1% ●
(%)
U0-07 DI Input State 1 ●
DO Output
U0-08 1 ●
State
U0-09 AI1 Voltage (V) 0.01V ●
U0-11 Reserved ●
U0-12 Count Value 1 ●
U0-13 Length Value 1 ●
Load Speed
U0-14 1 ●
Display
U0-15 PID Setting 1 ●
- 93 -
U0-16 PID Feedback 1 ●
U0-17 PLC Stage 1 ●
Input PULSE
U0-18 Frequency 0.01 kHz ●
(kHz)
Feedback
U0-19 0.1Hz ●
Speed (0.1Hz)
U0-20 Setting Torque 0.1% ●
AI1 Voltage
U0-21 before 0.001V ●
Correction
AI2 Voltage
U0-22 before 0.001V ●
Correction
U0-23 Reserved ●
U0-24 Line Speed 1m/Min ●
Current Power
U0-25 1Min ●
on Time
Current
U0-26 0.1Min ●
Running Time
Input PULSE
U0-27 1Hz ●
Frequency
Communication
U0-28 0.01% ●
Setting Value
U0-29 Reserved ●
Main Frequency
U0-30 0.01Hz ●
A display
Auxiliary
U0-31 Frequency B 0.01Hz ●
Display
View Any
U0-32 Memory 1 ●
Address Value
Surplus
U0-35 0.1Min ●
Running Time
U0-36 Reserved ●
Power Factor
U0-37 0.1° ●
Angle
U0-38 Reserved ●
VF Separation
U0-39 1V ●
Target Voltage
- 94 -
VF Separation
U0-40 1V ●
Output Voltage
Visual Display
U0-41 1 ●
DI Input State
Visual Display
U0-42 1 ●
DO Input State
DI Function
Status Visual
U0-43 Display 1 1 ●
(Function
01~40)
DI Function
Status Visual
(Function
41~80)
Current Fault
U0-45 1 ●
Status
Torque
U0-46 Compensation 0.1% ●
Amount
- 95 -
Parameter Description VD520 Series Inverter User Manual
Chapter 6 Parameter Description

F0 Basic Function
Led unit’s digit: motor 1
0: V/F control
1: SVC
F0-00 Motor Control Mode 0x00 ◎
Led ten’s digit: motor 2
0: V/F control
1: SVC
0: V/F control mode:
Suitable for load demand is not high, or a frequency inverter drive multi-motors application, such as
fan and pump load.
1: SVC
Refers to the open loop vector control, suitable for the usual higher performance control occasions,
one frequency inverter can only drive a motor. Such as machine tools, centrifuge, wire drawing
machine, injection machine and the load.
Tip: when select the vector control mode must done motor parameter identification process. Only
accurate motor parameter can give a full pay to the superiority of the vector control mode. By
adjusting the speed regulator parameter F3 group function code (motor 2 is A3 group), can obtain
better performance.
0: Control panel command source (L/R OFF)
1: Terminal command source
Running Command
F0-01 (L/R ON) 0 ○
Source Selection
2: communication command source
(L/R flashes)
Select the input channel of the inverter control command:

Inverter run command include: start, stop, forward run, reverse run, jog, etc.
0: Control panel command source (L/R OFF)
Key” RUN, JOG/REV, STOP/RESET” on control panel to realize command control.
1: Terminal command source (L/R ON)
Through multi-function input terminal to realize command control.
2: Communication command source (L/R flashes)
Operation command as setup via HOST PC via communication mode, when select this option, default
is Modbus communication (standard), can optional communication card (Profibus-DP card or
CANopen card, etc.).
And the communication related function parameters, see “Fd group communication parameters”
instructions, and reference the corresponding communication card added, supplemented by the
communication card with communication card, the appendix of this manual contains brief description
of communication card.
- 96 -
VD520 Series Inverter User Manual Parameter Description
0: Digital setting(F0-09, UP/DOWN can be

modified, no memory when power failure)
1: Digital setting(F0-09, UP/DOWN can be
modified, memory when power failure)
2: AI1
3: AI2
Main Frequency 4: Reserved
F0-02 10 ◎
Source A Selection 5: PULSE setting
6: MS reference
7: Simple PLC
8: PID
Select inverter input channel of in main given frequency, total 11 kinds of main given frequency
channel.
0: Digital setting(no memory when power failure)
Set the initial value of frequency F0-09 (preset frequency) value. Can bring through a keyboard keys
▲and▼(or multi-function input terminal of the UP/DOWN) to change the set frequency value of the
frequency inverter.
When frequency inverter power on again after power off, set frequency value revert to F0-09 (digital
setting preset frequency) value.
1: Digital setting(memory when power failure)
Set the initial value of frequency F0-09 (preset frequency) value. Can bring through a keyboard keys
▲and▼(or multi-function input terminal of the UP/DOWN) to change the set frequency value of the
frequency inverter.
When frequency inverter power on again after power off, set frequency is the set frequency that
power off in last time, can bring through a keyboard keys ▲and▼(or multi-function input terminal of
the UP/DOWN) correction by memory.
What need reminds is, F0-17 is “digital set frequency stop memory selection”, F0-17 is used to select
the frequency correction is memory or reset when inverter stop. F0-17 is associated with downtime,
not related to the power lost memory, should pay attention to in the application.
2: AI1
3: AI2
Refers to the frequency by the analog input terminal to determine. VD520 control panel provides two
analog input terminal (AI1, AI2).
Among them, the AI1 for -10V~10V input voltage type, AI2 for -10V~10V voltage input, can also be
used to 0mA/4mA~20mA current input, select by J5 jump line on control panel.
AI1, AI2 input voltage values of the corresponding relationship with the target frequency, users are
free to choose. VD520 provide 5 set of corresponding relation curve, 3 groups of curve for linear
relationship (2 points correspondence), 2 set of curves for the corresponding relation of 4 point any
curve, user can be set by F5 group function code.
Function code F5-20 used to set the AI1, AI2 three road analog input, select 5 groups respectively in
a curve, and 5 curve’s corresponding relation please refer to the F5 group function code.
5: PULSE setting (HDI1)
Frequency is given by terminal pulse setting.
Pulse signal given specifications: voltage range 9V~30V and frequency range of 0kHz~100kHz.
Pulse can only be given from multi-function input terminal HDI1 input.
- 97 -
HDI1 terminal input pulse frequency and the corresponding set of relations, through the F5-37~F5-40
setting, the corresponding relations of 2 points of straight line, the corresponding set of input pulses
100.0%, is refers to the relative maximum frequency F0-10 percentage.
6: MS reference
Select MS reference operation mode, need through the digital quantity input DI terminal state of
different combination, corresponding to different set frequency values. VD520 can set up more than 4
MS reference terminal, the 16 kinds of sate of 4 terminals by FC group function code corresponding
to the arbitrary 16 “MS reference”, “MS reference” is relatively maximum frequency F0-10 percentage.
When DI digital quantity input terminals as MS reference terminal function, need to do accordingly
setting in the F5 group, specific content please refer to the related function parameters of F5 group.
7: Simple PLC
When frequency source is simple PLC, the operation frequency source of inverter can be in 1~16
arbitrary frequency switching between operation instruction, holding time 1~16 frequency instructions,
their respective deceleration time can also be user settings, specific content reference FC group of
related instructions.
8: PID
The selection process of PID control output as the running frequency. Commonly used in the scene of
the closed loop technology, such as constant pressure closed loop control, constant tension
closed-loop, etc.
Application of PID as frequency source, you need to set up FA group (PID function parameter group)
related parameters.
Refers to the main frequency source by the HC is given by way of communication.
VD520 supports three kinds of communication mode: Modbus, Profibus-DP, CANopen, the three
kinds of communication can’t be used at the same time.
Modbus communication is standard, the other two kinds of communication card is optional, the user
to select according to need, and need to set the parameters F0-23 (communication extension card
type) correctly.
Frequency source is given by keypad potentiometer.
Main Frequency
F0-03 0.000~10.000 1.000 ○
A Gain
The actual value of main frequency source A=F0-02*F0-03.
Auxiliary Frequency Same as F0-02 (Main Frequency

F0-04 0 ◎
Source A Selection Source A Selection)
Auxiliary frequency source as a separate frequency given channel (that is, the switching frequency
source selection for A to B), its usage same as the main frequency source A, the method of use can
reference the related description of F0-02.
When auxiliary frequency source used as superposition of given (i.e. frequency source selection for
A+B, A to A+B switch or B to A+B switch), need to pay attention to:
1) When the auxiliary frequency source for digital given, preset frequency (F0-09) doesn’t work,
the user through the keyboard ▲,▼ key (or the UP/DOWN of multi-function input terminal) for
the adjustment of the frequency.
2) When the auxiliary frequency source for analog input given (AI1, AI2) or pulse input given, input
100% of the set corresponding auxiliary frequency source range, can be set through by the
F0-06 and F0-07.
3) When frequency source for pulse input given, is similar to analog given.
Tip: auxiliary frequency source selection B and main frequency source A selection, can’t be set to the
same channel, namely F0-02 and F0-04 can’t set to the same value, otherwise easy to cause
- 98 -
confusion.
Unit’s digit: frequency source selection
1: Main auxiliary operation result(operational
relationship is determined by ten Bits)
2: Main frequency source A switching with
auxiliary frequency source B
Frequency Source 3: Main frequency source A switching with
F0-05 Superposition main auxiliary operation result 0x00 ○
Selection
Ten’s digit: frequency source main auxiliary
operation relationship
0: Main + auxiliary
1: Main – auxiliary
2: Max value of the two
3: Min value of the two
Through this parameter selection frequency given channel. Through the compound of main frequency
source A and auxiliary frequency source B to achieve frequency given.
Unit’s digit: frequency source selection
Main frequency A as the target frequency.
1: Main and auxiliary operation result
Main and auxiliary operation result as the target frequency, the main and auxiliary operation
relationship please see the “ten’s digit” instruction of this function code.
2: The main frequency source A switch auxiliary frequency source B
When multi-function input terminal function 20 (frequency source switch) is invalid, main frequency A
as the target frequency.
When multi-function input terminal function 20 (frequency source switch) is valid, auxiliary frequency
B as the target frequency.
3: The main frequency source A switch main and auxiliary operation result
When multi-function input terminal function 20 (frequency source switch) is invalid, main frequency A
as the target frequency.
When multi-function input terminal function 20 (frequency source switch) is valid, main and auxiliary
operation result as the target frequency.
4: Auxiliary frequency source B switch main and auxiliary operation result
When multi-function input terminal function 20 (frequency source switch) is invalid, auxiliary
frequency B as the target frequency.
When multi-function input terminal function 20 (frequency source switch) is valid, main and auxiliary
operation result as the target frequency.
Ten’s digit: frequency source main and auxiliary operation relations
0: Main frequency source A + auxiliary frequency source B
The sum of main frequency A and auxiliary frequency B as the target frequency. To realize frequency
superposition of given function.
1: The main frequency source A – auxiliary frequency source B
The main frequency A minus auxiliary frequency B difference as the target frequency.
2: MAX (main frequency source A, auxiliary frequency source B)
Take the maximum absolute of main frequency A and auxiliary frequency B as the target frequency.
3: Min (main frequency source A, auxiliary frequency source B)
- 99 -
Take the minimum absolute of main frequency A and auxiliary frequency B as the target frequency.
In addition, when the frequency source selection for the main and auxiliary operation, can be set the
offset frequency through F0-08, superimposed offset frequency on the main and auxiliary operation
result in a flexible response to all kinds of needs.
Auxiliary Frequency
Source B Range 1: Relative to the max frequency
F0-06 0 ○
Reference Selection 2: Relative to frequency source A
when Superimposed
Auxiliary Frequency
F0-07 Source B Range 0%~150% 100% ○
when Superimposed
When selecting frequency source for the “frequency superposition” (F0-05 set to 1, 3 or 4), these two
parameters used to determine the adjusting range of auxiliary frequency source.
F0-06 is used to determine the relative object of the scope of the auxiliary frequency source, can
select to the relative to the maximum frequency, can also be relative to the main frequency source A,
if the selection is relative to the main frequency source, the scope of the auxiliary frequency source
will change as main frequency source A change.
Auxiliary
Frequency
F0-08 Source Offset 0.00Hz~max frequency F0-10 0.00Hz ○
Frequency when
Superimposed
This function code is only valid at the time of frequency source selection of the main and auxiliary
operation.
When the frequency source is main and auxiliary operation, F0-08 as offset frequency, and with main
and auxiliary operation result superimposed as the final frequency set value, make the frequency set
can be more flexible.
Digital Setting
F0-09 0.00Hz~max frequency (F0-10) 50.00Hz ○
Frequency
When frequency source selection as “digital setting” or “terminal UP/DOWN”, the function code value
is the initial value of frequency digital setting of inverter.
F0-10 Max Frequency 50.00Hz~600.00Hz 50.00Hz ◎
VD520 analog input, pulse input (HDI1), multi-reference etc., 100% of their relative to F0-10 scaling
as frequency source.
0: F0-12 setting
1: AI1
Frequency Upper 2: AI2
F0-11 0 ◎
Limit Source 3: Reserved
4: PULSE setting
Define the frequency upper limit source. Frequency upper limit can be from digital setting (F0-12),
also from the analog input channel. When use analog input set the frequency upper limit, 100% of the
analog input set corresponding F0-12.
For example at the scene of the winding control using torque control mode, in order to avoid material
break appear “galloping” phenomenon, can use analog set the frequency upper limit, when inverter
running to the frequency upper limit value, the frequency inverter in frequency upper limit running.
- 100 -
Frequency Upper Frequency lower limit F0-14~max frequency

F0-12 50.00Hz ○
Limit F0-10
Frequency Upper
F0-13 0.00Hz~max frequency F0-10 0.00Hz ○
Limit Offset
When the frequency upper limit for analog or PULSE setting, F0-13 as the offset of set value, the
offset frequency and F0-11 set frequency upper limit value superposition, as the final frequency upper
limit set value.
Frequency Lower
F0-14 0.00Hz~frequency upper limit F0-12 0.00Hz ○
Limit
When frequency instructions is lower than the frequency lower limit of F0-14 set, inverter can stop,
running at frequency lower limit or zero speed, what running mode can be through the F1-17 (set
frequency is lower than the frequency lower limit running mode) set.
Frequency
F0-15 Command 2: 0.01Hz 2 ●
Resolution
The parameter used to determine all the resolution of the function code associated with the
frequency.
When frequency resolution is 0.01Hz, the maximum output frequency of VD520 is 600.00Hz.
Frequency
Command 0: Running frequency
F0-16 UP/DOWN 0 ◎
Reference in 1: Setting frequency
Running
This parameter is only valid when frequency source for the digital setting.
Used to determine the keypad key ▲,▼ or terminal UP/DOWN action, adopt what way correction set
frequency, namely the target frequency is increase or decrease based on the running frequency, or
increase or decrease base on the set frequency.
The difference between two kinds of settings, evident when inverter in the deceleration process,
namely if the running frequency of inverter is different with the set frequency, the parameter different
selection difference is very big.
Digital Setting
Frequency 0: No memory
F0-17 0 ○
Memory Selection 1: Memory
when Stop
The function is only valid when frequency source for the digital setting.
“No memory” refers to the frequency inverter after downtime, digital set frequency values revert to
F0-09 (preset frequency) value, keypad key ▲,▼or terminal UP/DOWN to correct the frequency is
zero.
“Memory” refers to the frequency inverter after downtime, digital set frequency keep set frequency for
the last moment downtime, keypad key ▲,▼or terminal UP/DOWN to correct the frequency is remain
valid.
F0-18 0.00s~65000s ○
1 dependent
Deceleration Time Model
F0-19 0.00s~65000s ○
1 dependent
Acceleration time refers to the time required that frequency inverter from zero frequency acceleration
to acceleration/deceleration reference frequency (F0-21), as show in figure 6-1 in the t1.
- 101 -
Deceleration time refers to the time required that frequency inverter from deceleration/deceleration
reference frequency (F0-21) deceleration to zero frequency, as show in figure 6-1 in the t2.
Output frequency(Hz)
Acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency
Set frequency
Time(t)
Actual acceleration time Actual deceleration
time
t1 t2
Set acceleration time Set deceleration time
Fig 6-1 Acceleration/deceleration time diagram

VD520 provide 4 groups acceleration/deceleration time, user can use digital input terminal DI switch
selection, 4 groups of acceleration/deceleration time through following function code to set:
The first group: F0-17, F0-18; The second group: Fb-03, Fb-04;
The third group: Fb-05, Fb-06; The forth group: Fb-07, Fb-08;
0: 1s
Acceleration/Decel
F0-20 1: 0.1s 1 ◎
eration Time Unit
2: 0.01s
To meet the need of all kinds of scene, VD520 provides three kinds of acceleration/deceleration time
units, is 1 seconds, 0.1 seconds and 0.01 seconds respectively.
Note: modify the function parameters, 4 groups of acceleration/deceleration time display the decimal
digits will change, the corresponding acceleration/deceleration time also change, should pay attention
to in the process of application.
Acceleration and 0: Max frequency(F0-10)

Deceleration Time
F0-21 1: Setting frequency 0 ◎
Reference
Frequency 2: 100Hz
Acceleration/deceleration time, refers to the acceleration/deceleration time from frequency zero to

F0-21 set frequency, figure 6-1 is acceleration/deceleration time diagram.
When F0-21 select for 1, the acceleration/deceleration time is associated with set frequency, if set
frequency change frequently, the acceleration of motor is change, need to pay attention to in
applications.
- 102 -
Unit’s digit: Operation panel command binding

frequency source selection
0: No binding
1: Digital setting frequency
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: Reserved
5: PULSE setting
Command Source 6: MS reference
F0-22 Bound Frequency 0x0000 ○
7: Simple PLC
Source
8: PID
Ten’s digit: terminal command binding frequency
source selection, same as above
Hundred’s digit: communication command binding
frequency source selection, same as above
Thousand’s digit: Automatic operation command
binding frequency source selection, same as
above
Define the bound combination between three run command channel and nine kinds of frequency
given channel, convenient to realize synchronous switch.
The meaning of the above frequency for given channel is same with the main frequency source X
selection F0-02, please see the description of F0-02 function code.
The different run command channels can be bound to the same frequency given channel.
When the command source has bundled frequency source, during the effective period of this
command source, the set frequency source of F0-02~F0-07 is no longer work.
Communication
F0-23 0: Modbus 0 ●
Protocol Selection
See chapter 9 communication protocol description.

0: Motor 1
F0-24 Motor Selection 0 ◎
1: Motor 2
VD520 supports the application of frequency inverter time-sharing drag 2 motor respectively,
electrical motor nameplate parameters can be set respectively by 2 motor, independent parameters
tuning, select different control modes, independent setting parameters related to run performance etc.
Motor 1 corresponding function parameter is F2 and F3 group, motor 2 corresponding function
parameter A3 group.
The user through the F0-24 function code to select current motor, also can through the digital quantity
input terminals DI switch motor. When function code selection and terminal selection contradiction,
the terminal selection shall prevail.
1: G type (constant torque load model)
F0-25 GP Type Selection 1 ◎
2: P type (fan, pump type load models)
1: Is suitable for the constant torque load of specified rated parameters.

2: Is suitable for the variable torque load of specified rated parameters (fan, pump).
- 103 -
F1 Start/Stop Control Group

0: Direct start
F1-00 Start Mode 0 ○
2: Pre excitation start (AC
asynchronous )
0: Direct start
If start dc braking time is set to 0, the frequency inverter starting run from start frequency.
If start dc braking time is not zero, the dc braking first, and then starting run from start frequency.
Apply the occasion that have small inertia load, motor may be turning at starting.
Frequency inverter judgment for motor speed and direction first, and to track the frequency of the
motor starting, smooth and no impact on the implementation of the rotating motor startup. Applicable
to large inertia of the instantaneous power failure to start again. In order to guarantee the
performance of speed tracking restart, motor F1 group parameters should be accurately set.
2: Asynchronous motor pre-excitation start
Only valid for asynchronous motor, used to build magnetic field in motor running before.
Pre excitation current, pre exciting time see the description of function code F1-03, F1-04.
If pre excitation time is set to 0, the frequency inverter to cancel the excitation process, from start
frequency to start. Pre excitation time is not zero, the first pre excitation restart, can improve the motor
dynamic response performance.
F1-01 Starting Frequency 0.00Hz~10.00Hz 0.50Hz ○
Startup Frequency
F1-02 0.00s~100.00s 0.0s ◎
Holding Time
In order to ensure the motor torque of startup, please set the right start frequency. In order to make
fully establish flux when the motor start, need to start the frequency to keep a certain time.
Start frequency F1-01 without being limited by the lower limit frequency. But when goal setting
frequency is less than the start frequency, frequency inverter is not started in the standby state.
In the process of positive & negative switching, start frequency holding time doesn’t work.
Start frequency holding time is not included in the acceleration / deceleration time, but in the simple
PLC running time.
For example 1:
F0-02=0 Frequency source is digital given
F0-09=2.00Hz Digital set frequency is 2.00Hz
F1-01=5.00Hz Start frequency is 5.00Hz
F1-02=2.0s Start frequency holding time is 2.0s
At this point, the inverter will be in standby state, the inverter output frequency is 0.00Hz.
For example 2:
F0-02=0 Frequency source is digital given
F0-09=10.00Hz Digital set frequency is 10.00Hz
F1-01=5.00Hz Start frequency is 5.00Hz
F1-02=2.0s Start frequency holding time is 2.0s
At this point, the inverter accelerate to 5.00Hz for 2.0s, then accelerated to given frequency 10.00Hz.
- 104 -
Starting DC Braking
F1-03 Current/ Pre-excitation 0%~100% 0% ◎
Current
Starting DC Braking Time

F1-04 0.0s~100.0s 0.0s ◎
/ Pre-excitation Time
Start the dc braking, generally used to make the running motor restart after stop. Pre excitation is
used to make the asynchronous motor build magnetic field first then restart, improve the response
speed.
Start the dc braking is only valid for starting mode is direct startup. The inverter dc braking will
according to the first startup dc braking current setting, start running again after start the dc braking
time. If set dc braking time is 0, then directly start without dc braking. The greater the dc braking
current, the bigger the braking force.
If the starting mode is asynchronous motor pre-excitation start, the inverter according to the first set of
pre excitation current build magnetic field beforehand, start running again after the pre excitation time
setting. If set pre excitation time is 0, then directly start without dc braking.
Start dc braking current/pre excitation current, is relative to the percentage of the frequency inverter
rated current.
LED unit’s digit: tracking direction

selection
0: According to the actual test direction
1: According to the setting frequency
F1-05 Speed Tracking Mode direction 0x10 ○
LED ten’s digit: zero speed excitation
selection
0: No exciting
1: Exciting
When the motor running frequency is very low, hardware detect the counter electromotive force is
very weak, the accuracy of the motor speed identification is reduced, and through the excitation, it
can get more accurate actual motor speed.
Delay Time of Rotation

F1-06 0ms~2000ms 500ms ○
Speed Tracking
Speed tracking startup mode, the frequency inverter receives the start signal, delay the time to start
speed tracking.
Voltage Rise Rate of

F1-07 0~1000 100 ○
Rotation Speed Tracking
The greater the value is set, the faster the speed tracking, too much but easy to cause overvoltage
fault, etc; the smaller the value is set, the speed tracking time will be longer.
0: Decelerate to stop
F1-08 Stop Mode 0 ○
1: Coast to stop
0: decelerate to stop
After stop command effective, inverter reduced the output frequency according to deceleration time,
frequency downtime after drop to zero.
1: Coast to stop
After stop command effective, inverter stop output immediately, the motor coast to stop according to
the mechanical inertia.
F1-09 Initial Frequency of Stop 0.00Hz~max frequency 0.00Hz ○
- 105 -
DC Braking
Waiting Time of Stop DC

F1-10 0.0s~100.0s 0.0s ○
Braking
F1-11 Stop DC Braking Current 0%~100% 0% ○
F1-12 Stop DC Braking Time 0.0s~100.0s 0.0s ○
Initial frequency of stop dc braking: in the process of deceleration, when reduce the running
frequency to the frequency, began to dc braking process.
Waiting time of stop dc braking: when reduce the running frequency to initial frequency of stop dc
braking, frequency inverter output to stop for a period of time, and then began to dc braking process.
Used to prevent began to dc braking may be caused overcurrent such faults at high speed.
Stop dc braking current: refers to the output current when dc braking, relative to the percentage of the
motor rated current. The greater the value is, the stronger the dc braking effect is, but the greater the
fever of motor and frequency inverter is.
Stop dc braking time: refers to the dc braking holding time. The dc baking process has been cancelled
when this value is 0.
Stop dc braking process as shown in figure 6-2.
Stop DC braking
initial frequency
Output voltage Time(t)

valid values
Waiting time of
DC braking
Stop DC braking
Time(t)
Run command Stop DC braking
time
Fig 6-2 Stop dc braking diagram
F1-13 Stop Frequency 0.00Hz~max frequency 0.50 ○
Stop Frequency Holding

F1-14 0.0s~60.0s 0.0s ○
Time
When inverter output frequency slowed to F1-13 (stop frequency), keep F1-14 (stop frequency
holding time), the inverter stop (blockade output), motor inertial parking.
Restart Selection Upon 0: Enabled

F1-15 0 ○
Power Failure 1: Disabled
- 106 -
Waiting Time of Restart

F1-16 0.0s~60.0s 0.0s ○
Upon Power Failure
Used to run command source is terminal control.

Enabled: when terminal run command has maintained, inverter will autostart after power on
self-inspection normal and delay the time of F1-16.
Disabled: when terminal run command has maintained, inverter will not autostart after power on
self-inspection normal, only start when run command given again after disconnecting.
Operation Mode of 0: Running with frequency lower limit

Setting Frequency is
F1-17 1: Stop 0 ○
Lower than the
Frequency Lower Limit 2: Zero speed running
When set frequency is lower than the frequency lower limit, the running state of inverter can be
through the parameter selection. VD520 provide three kinds of running mode, meet various
application requirements.
Start Selection of
Setting Frequency is 0: Don’t start
F1-18 1 ◎
Lower than the Start 1: Zero speed running
Frequency
When set frequency is lower than the start frequency, the running state of inverter can be through the
parameter selection. VD520 provide two kinds of running mode, meet various application
requirements.
0: Same direction
F1-19 Run Direction 0 ○
1: Opposite direction
By changing the function code, can not change the motor wiring and implement the purpose of
change motor rotation, its effect is equivalent to adjust motor (U, V, W) any two lines for motor
direction of rotation transformation.
Tip: after initialization parameter will restore the original state of the motor running direction. For the
occasion that forbidden to change the motor rotation after system debugging good should be used
with caution.
0: Allow reverse
F1-20 Reverse Control Enable 0 ○
1: Prohibit reverse
Through the parameter set inverter is allowed to run or not in reverse state, in the case of not allow
motor reversal, need to set F1-20=1.
FWD/REV Rotation
F1-21 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ○
Dead-zone Time
In the process of set the frequency inverter positive & negative transition, output transition time at 0Hz,
as shown in figure 6-3.
- 107 -
Output
frequency(Hz)
Forward
Reverse
Dead-zone time
Fig 6-3 Schematic diagram of forward/reverse dead-zoen time
Dynamic Braking 0: Disabled

F1-22 0 ○
Enable 1: Enabled
F1-23 Braking Usage Rate 0%~100% 100% ○
Only be effective for the inverter that built-in braking unit.

Used to adjust the duty ratio of braking unit, the higher the usage rate is, the higher the duty ratio of
braking unit is, the stronger the braking effect is, the bigger the inverter bus voltage fluctuation in
braking process is.
0: The whole is effective

1: Only overpressure stall enable
Over-excitation Effective effectively
F1-24 2 ◎
Range
2: Only deceleration process effectively
3: The whole is invalid
F1-25 Over-excitation Gain 0~200 100 ○
Over-excitation Filter
F1-26 0~10 3 ○
Coefficients
Over-excitation control can inhibit the bus voltage rise, avoid the overvoltage fault. The bigger the
over-excitation gain is, the better the inhibition effect is; buy over-excitation gain is too large, easy to
cause the output current increases, need to weigh in the application. Increase the over-excitation filter
coefficients to slow the speed of inverter response over-excitation control, on the contrary, you can
speed up the inverter response the speed of over-excitation control.
0: Straight-line acceleration/deceleration
Acceleration /
F1-27 1: S curve acceleration/deceleration A 0 ◎
Deceleration Mode
Select the inverter frequency change mode in the process of start and stop.
0: Straight-line acceleration/deceleration
Output frequency increase or decrease according to the linear. VD520 provide four kinds of
deceleration time. Select by multi-function digital input terminal (F5-01~F5-05).
1: S curve acceleration/deceleration A
- 108 -
Output frequency increase or decrease according to the S curve. S curve is used in the pace with
gentle start or stop demand, such as elevator, conveyor belt, etc. Function code F1-28 and F1-29
respectively defined the time scale of inertial stage and finish stage of S curve
acceleration/deceleration.
In the S curve acceleration/deceleration B, rated motor frequency

f
b always S curve inflection point.
As shown in figure 6-4. Generally used in the occasion that high-speed areas of above the rated
frequency need to be rapid acceleration/deceleration.
When set frequency above rated frequency, deceleration time is:
2
 
 4  f  5 
t        T
 9  f  9 

  b  

Among them, f is set frequency,

f b is the rated motor frequency, T is the time for 0 frequency
accelerate to
f b rated frequency.
Time Ratio of S Curve
F1-28 0.0%~(100.0%-F1-26) 30.0% ◎
Start Segment
Time Ratio of S Curve
F1-29 0.0%~(100.0%-F1-25) 30.0% ◎
End Segment
Function code F1-28 and F1-29 respectively defined the time scale of inertial stage and finish stage of
S curve acceleration/deceleration, two function code need to meet: F1-28+F1-29≤100.0%
T1 in figure 6-4 is the F1-28 defined parameters, the slope of output frequency changes in this period
of time increased gradually. T2 is the F1-29 defined time, the slope of output frequency changes in
this period of time change to 0 gradually.
Between t1 and t2 time, the slope of output frequency changes is fixed, namely for linear
acceleration/deceleration in this stage.
Set frequency(f)
Time(t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
S curve acceleration/deceleration A diagram
- 109 -
Set frequency(f)
Rated frequency(fb)
Time(t)
T T
S curve acceleration/deceleration B diagram

Fig 6-4 S curve acceleration/deceleration diagram
- 110 -
F2 Motor 1 Parameter
0: Ordinary asynchronous motor
F2-00 Motor Type Selection 1: Frequency conversion 0 ◎
asynchronous motor
Model
F2-01 Rated Motor Power 0.1kW~1000.0kW ◎
dependent
Model
F2-02 Rated Motor Voltage 1V~2000V ◎
dependent
0.01A~655.35A (Inverter
Model
F2-03 Rated Motor Current power≤55kW) ◎
dependent
0.1A~6553.5A (Inverter power>55kW)
Model
F2-04 Rated Motor Frequency 0.01Hz~max frequency ◎
dependent
Rated Motor Rotation Model

F2-05 1RPM~65535RPM ◎
Speed dependent
The above function code for parameters of motor nameplates, whether using V/D control or vector
control, all need according to the motor nameplate set the related parameters accurately.
In order to obtain better performance of V/F or vector control, motor parameter tuning is required, and
the accuracy of the adjust results, close relation to correctly set motor nameplate parameters.
0.001Ω~65.535Ω (Inverter
Asynchronous Motor power≤55kW) Tune
F2-06 ◎
Stator Resistance 0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω (Inverter parameter
power>55kW)
0.001Ω~65.535Ω (Inverter
F2-07 ◎
Rotor Resistance 0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω (Inverter parameter
power>55kW)
0.01mH ~655.35mH (Inverter
F2-08 Leakage Inductive ◎
0.001mH ~65.535mH (Inverter parameter
Reactance
power>55kW)
0.1mH~6553.5mH (Inverter
F2-09 Mutual Inductive ◎
0.01mH ~655.35mH (Inverter parameter
Reactance
power>55kW)
Asynchronous Motor 0.01A~F2-03 (Inverter power≤55kW) Tune

F2-10 ◎
No-load Current 0.1A~F2-03 (Inverter power>55kW) parameter
F2-06~F2-10 is the parameter of asynchronous motor, in generally the motor nameplate don’t have
these parameters, need through the inverter automatic tuning. Among them, the “asynchronous motor
static tuning” can only get the F2-06~F2-08 three parameters, and “asynchronous motor complete
tuning” besides can get here all five parameters, can also get the encode phase sequence, current
loop PI parameter etc.
Change the rated motor power (F2-01) or rated motor voltage (F2-02), the inverter will automatically
modify F2-06~F2-10 parameter values, return the five parameters for commonly used standard Y
- 111 -
series motor parameters.

If the site can’t tuned for asynchronous motor, can according to the parameters given by motor
manufacturer, input the above corresponding function code.
0: No operation
F2-26 Tune Selection 1: Asynchronous motor static tuning 0 ◎
2: Asynchronous motor complete tuning
0: No operation, namely the tuning is prohibited.

1: Asynchronous motor static tuning, suitable for the occasion of asynchronous motor and load is not
easy to release, but can’t be complete tuning.
Asynchronous motor static tuning before, must be properly set motor type and motor nameplate
parameters F2-00~F2-05. Asynchronous motor static tuning, inverter can obtain F2-06~F2-08 three
parameters.
Action description: set the function code to 1, and then press RUN key, inverter will conduct static
tuning.
2: Asynchronous motor complete tuning
In order to guarantee the dynamic control performance of the frequency inverter, please select
complete tuning, the motor must disconnect with load, and to keep the motor for the idling condition.
In the process of complete tuning, inverter conduct to static tuning first, and then according to the
acceleration time F0-18 to the 80% of rated motor frequency, after a period of time, accordance with
the deceleration time F0-19 slowing down and end tuning.
Before asynchronous motor is complete tuning, you need to setup the motor type and motor
nameplate parameters F2-00~F2-05.
Asynchronous motor complete tuning, frequency inverter can get F2-06~F2-10 five motor parameters,
vector control current loop PI parameter F3-13~F3-16.
Action description: set the function code to 2, and then press the RUN button, inverter will be
complete tuning.
- 112 -
F3 Motor 1 Vector Control Parameter

Speed Loop 01~100
F3-00 30 ○
Proportional Gain 1
Speed Loop Integral

F3-01 0.01s~10.00s 0.50s ○
Time 1
F3-02 Switch Frequency 1 0.00~F3-05 5.00Hz ○
Speed Loop
F3-03 1~100 20 ○
Proportional Gain 2
Speed Loop Integral

F3-04 0.01s~10.00s 1.00s ○
Time 2
F3-05 Switching Frequency 2 F3-02~max frequency 10.00Hz ○
Under different frequency inverter running, you can select a different speed loop PI parameters.
When running frequency is less than the switching frequency 1 (F3-02), speed loop PI adjust the
parameter to F3-00 and F3-01. When running frequency is greater than the switching frequency 2,
speed loop PI adjust the parameter to F3-03 and F3-04. The speed loop PI parameter between
switching frequency 1 and switching frequency 2, for linear switching of two group PI parameters, as
shown in figure 6-5.
PI parameter
F3-00
F3-01
F3-03
F3-04
F3-02 F3-05 Frequency reference
Fig 6-5 Parameter diagram

By setting the proportional coefficient and integral time of speed regulator, can adjust the speed of
dynamic response characteristics of vector control.
Increase the proportional gain, reduce the integration time, the dynamic response of the speed loop.
But the proportional gain is too large or integration is too less could make the system produce
oscillation. Suggestion adjustment method is:
If factor parameters can’t meet the requirements, then fine-tuning based on the factory value
parameters, to increase the proportional gain, ensure system no oscillation; and then reduce the
integration time, make the system with faster response characteristics, and smaller overshoot.
Note: if the PI parameters set is improper, may lead to excessive speed overshoot, even occur
overvoltage fault in overshoot fall back.
F3-06 Vector Control Slip Gain 20%~200% 100% ○
To speed sensorless vector control, this parameter is used to adjust motor steady speed precision:
low speed when the motor load is increasing this parameter, vice versa.
To speed sensor vector control, this parameter can adjust inverter output current size in the same
loads.
- 113 -
Speed Loop Filter Time

F3-07 0.000s~0.100s 0.000s ○
Constant
Under the vector control mode, the output of the speed loop controller for torque current instruction,
the parameter is used for filtering for torque instruction. Generally do not need to adjust the
parameters, it can be appropriately increase the filtering time when speed is volatile; if motor volatility,
this parameters should be reduced.
Speed loop filter time constant is small, the inverter output torque may be volatile, but the response of
the speed is fast.
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Motor Torque Upper 4: PULSE setting
F3-09 0 ○
Limit Source 5: Communication setting
6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
7: MAX (AI1, AI2)
Digital Setting for Motor

F3-10 0%~200.0% 150.0% ○
Torque Upper Limit

1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Brake Torque Upper 4: PULSE setting
F3-11 0 ○
Limit Source 5: Communication setting
6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
7: MAX (AI1, AI2)
Digital Setting for Brake

F3-12 0%~200.0% 150.0% ○
Torque Upper Limit
In speed control mode, the maximum value of the inverter output torque, by the torque limit source
control.
F3-09 is used to select the set source of torque upper limit, when setting by analog, PULSE,
communication, 100% of corresponding set corresponding F3-10, and 100% of F3-10 is the inverter
rated torque.
Excitation Adjustment
F3-13 0~60000 2000 ○
Proportional Gain
Excitation Adjustment
F3.14 0 ~60000 1300 ○
Integral Gain
Torque Adjustment
F3-15 0~60000 2000 ○
Proportional Gain
- 114 -
Torque Adjustment
F3-16 0~60000 1300 ○
Integral Gain
Vector control current loop PI regulation parameter, the parameter will automatically receive after in
the asynchronous motor complete tuning, generally do not need to be modified.
What need reminds is, current loop integral controller, integration time is not used as the dimension,
but directly setting the integral gain. Current loop PI gain setting is too big, may lead to the control
loops oscillation, so when the current oscillation or torque fluctuation change greatly, can be manually
reduce the PI proportional gain and integral gain here.
Speed Loop Integral 0: Disabled

F3-17 0 ○
Separation Enable 1: Enabled
To prevent the overregulation, generally do not need to adjust.
Max Weak Magnetic

F3-20 1%~300% 50% ○
Current
Weak Magnetic
F3-21 Automatic Gain 10%~500% 100% ○
Adjustment
Weak Magnetic Integral

F3-22 2~10 2 ○
Multiples
Change the F3-21 and F3-22 can change the adjustment speed of weak magnetic current, but weak
magnetic current adjust faster could lead to instability, generally do not need to manually modify.
F3-23 Torque Boost Coefficient 0.0%~60.0% 10.0% ○
Torque Boost Cutoff

F3-24 0.00Hz~max frequency 20.00 ○
Frequency
In order to compensate the speed vector control low frequency torque characteristics, inverter output
voltage do some compensation when low frequency. But torque boost set is too large, motor easy to
overheat, inverter is easy to overcurrent.
When the load is heavier and motor starting torque is not enough, suggest increase this parameter,
can reduce the torque when the load is lighter.
Exciting Current
F3-25 0~500 0 ○
Compensation Gain
Torque Current
F3-26 0~500 0 ○
Compensation Gain
For the excitation current and torque current compensation of electricity blows quantitative
component in the vector control, generally do not need to be adjusted.
F3-27 Torque Response Gain 1~1000 10 ○
Increasing the gain will speed up the torque response.
- 115 -
F4 Motor 1 V/F Control Parameter

This function code is only effective for V/F control, is invalid for vector control.
V/F control is suitable for general load such as fan, water pump, or one inverter with more motor, or
inverter power and motor power different applications.

1: Multipoint V/F
2: Square V/F
3: 1.2#power V/F
F4-00 VF Curve Setting 4: 1.4#power V/F 0 ◎
5: 1.6#power V/F
6: 1.8#power V/F
7: V/F complete separation mode
8: V/F half separation mode
0: Straight line V/F. Suitable for ordinary constant torque load.
1: Multipoint V/F. Suitable for dewatering machine, centrifuge and other special load. At this point by
setting the F4-03~F4-08 parameters, arbitrary V/F relationship curves can be obtained.
2: Square V/F. Suitable for centrifugal load such as fans pumps.
3~6: V/F relationship curve between the straight line V/F and square V/F relationship curve.
7: V/F complete separation mode. The output frequency of frequency inverter and the output voltage
are independent of each other, output frequency be determined by the frequency source, and output
voltage be determined by F4-14 (V/F separation voltage source).
V/F complete separation mode, commonly used in these occasions such as induction heating,
inverter power supply, torque motor control.
8: V/F half separation mode.
In this case V and F is proportional, but the proportion relationship can be set through the voltage
source F4-14, and the relationship between V and F also with F1 group rated motor voltage and rated
frequency.
Assuming input voltage source for X (X is the value of 0~100%), the relationship between inverter
output voltage V and frequency F is:
V/F=2*X* (rated motor voltage) / (rated motor frequency)
Torque Boost Mode 0: Automatic torque boost

F4-01 0 ◎
Selection 1: Manual torque boost
Model
F4-02 Manual Torque Boost 0.0%~30.0% ○
dependent
Manual Torque Boost

F4-03 0.00Hz~max frequency 50.00Hz ◎
Cutoff Frequency
In order to compensate for V/F control low frequency torque characteristics, do some compensation
when the low frequency inverter output voltage. But torque boost is too large, motor easy to overheat,
inverter is easy to overcurrent.
When the heavier load and motor starting torque is not enough, suggest increase this parameter. Can
reduce the torque boost when lighter load.
When the torque boost is set to 0.0, frequency inverter is automatic torque boost, the frequency
inverter according to the motor stator resistance parameters etc. automatic calculation the torque of
appreciation.
Torque increase torque cut-off frequency: under this frequency, torque boost torque effectively, more
than the set frequency, torque boost failure, see below instructions.
- 116 -
Output voltage
Vb
V1
f1 fb Output frequency
V1: manual torque boost voltage Vb: max output voltage

f1: manual torque boost cutoff frequency fb: rated running frequency
Fig 6-6 Manual torque boost diagram
F4-04 MS VF Frequency Point 1 0.00Hz~F4-05 0.00Hz ◎

F4-05 MS VF Voltage Point 1 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ◎
F4-06 MS VF Frequency Point 2 F4-03~F4-07 0.00Hz ◎
F4-08 MS VF Frequency Point 3 F4-05~Rated motor frequency (F2-04) 0.00Hz ◎
F4-03~F4-08 six parameters defined multistage V/F curve.

The curve of multipoint V/F should set according to the motor load characteristic, what need note is,
the relationship between the three point voltage and frequency points must be satisfied: V1<V2<V3,
F1<F2<F3. Figure 6-7 is multipoint V/F curve set diagram.
Voltage%
Vb
V3
V2
V1
F1 F2 F3 Fb Frequency%
V1-V3: MS speed V/F voltage percentage of 1-3 section

F1-F3: MS speed V/F voltage percentage of 1-3 section
Vb: rated motor voltage Fb: rated motor running frequency
Fig 6-7 Multipoint V/F curve set diagram
Voltage set too high may lead to motor overheating or even burning when low frequency, frequency
inverter may be loss of speed or overcurrent protection.
- 117 -
VF Slip Compensation
F4-10 0.0%~200.0% 0.0% ◎
Gain
This parameter is only effective for asynchronous motor.

V/F slip compensation gain: can compensate asynchronous motor caused motor speed deviation
when the load increases, to make the speed of the motor can basically remained stable when the load
changes.
V/F slip compensation gain is set to 100.0%, says the slip of compensation for the rated motor slip
when the motor with rated load, and rated motor slip is by the inverter through F2 group rated motor
frequency and rated speed to calculate gain.
Adjust the V/F slip compensation gain, general when under rated load, motor speed and the target
speed basically the same as the principle. When the motor speed and the target value is not at the
same time, need appropriate fine-turning the gain.
F4-11 0 ◎
Suppresion Mode 1: Mode 1
F4-12 0~100 ○
V/F Maxmium
F4-13 Regulation of 0~1000 200 ○
Oscillation Suppression
The selection method of the gain is as far as possible on the premise of effectively restrain oscillation
in small, in order to avoid an adverse effect on operation of V/F.
Please select the gain is 0 when motor no oscillation phenomenon. Only in the obvious oscillation of
the motor, should be appropriate to increase the gain and the greater the gain, the more obvious the
suppression of the oscillation.
When using suppression oscillation function, wants the rated motor current and no-load current
parameters accurately, otherwise the V/F oscillation suppression effect is not good.

1: AI1
2: AI2
3: Reserve
4: PULSE setting
The Separation of VF
F4-14 5: MS instruction 0 ○
Voltage Source
6: Simple PLC
7: PID
motor voltage
VF Separation Voltage
F4-15 0V~rated motor voltage 0V ○
Digital Setting
V/F separation is commonly used in these occasions such as induction heating, inverter power supply
and torque motor control.
When choosing V/F separation control, output voltage can be through the function code F4-15 set,
also can come from the analog quantity, MS instruction, PLC, PID or communication given. When
using the non-numeric set, 100% corresponding rated motor voltage, when the percentage of the
analog output setting such as negative, is to set by absolute value as a valid value.
- 118 -
The voltage set directly by the F4-15.

1: AI1, 2, AI2
Voltage by the analog inputs to determined.
4: PULSE setting (DI5)
Voltage is given by the terminal pulse.
Pulse given signal specifications: voltage range: 9V~30V, frequency range: 0kHz~100kHz.
5: MS instruction
When voltage source for MS instruction, to set up the F5 and FC group parameters, to determine the
corresponding relation of given signal and given voltage.
6: Simple PLC
When voltage source for simple PLC, you need to set up the FC group parameters to determine given
output voltage.
7: PID
According to the PID closed-loop produce output voltage. Specific content see introduce of FA group.
Refers to the voltage by the HC is given by way of communication.
When above voltage source to select 1~8, 0%~100% are corresponding to the output voltage 0V~
rated motor voltage.
0.0s~1000.0s
F4-16 Remark: Indication the time that 0V rise 5.0s ○
Rise Time
to rated motor voltage
0.0s~1000.0s
F4-17 Remark: Indication the time that rated 5.0s ○
Fall Time
motor voltage drop to 0V
V/F separation needed time, as show below diagram.
Output voltage(V)
Rated motor voltage
Output voltage target value
Time(t)
Actual voltage boost time Actual voltage drop time
Set voltage boost time Set voltage drop time
Fig 6-8 V/F separation diagram
- 119 -
F5 Input Terminal Group

VD520 series inverter with six multi-function digital input terminals (including HDI1 can be used as a
high speed pulse input terminal), two analog input terminals.
0: Two-line mode 1
1: Two-line mode 2
Terminal Command 2: Three-line mode 1
F5-00 0 ◎
Mode 3: Three-line mode 2
4: Alternate control
5: Back and forth control
This parameter defines five different modes of controlling the operation of the inverter via the external
terminals
1: Two-line mode 1: This mode is the most commonly used two-line mode. The forward / reverse
rotation of the motor is decided by the commands of Dix, DIy terminals; when Dix and DIy are
effective, the inverter to keep the first effective terminal determined direction. The terminal function
set as below:
Terminal Set Value Description
Dix 1 Forward run
DIy 2 Reverse run
DIx, DIy is DI1~DI5, HDI1 Multi-function digital input terminals, electric level enabled.
Fig 6-9 Schematic diagram of two line mode 1

Two-line mode 2: When this mode is adopted, DIx is enabled terminal. The direction is determined by
the status of DIy. Terminal function set as below.
DIx 1 Running
DIy 2 (FWD/REV)
DIx, DIy is DI1~DI5, HDI1 Multi-function digital input terminals, electric level Enabled.
Fig 6-10 Schematic diagram of two line mode 2

Three-line control mode 1: In this mode, Dln is enabled terminal, and the direction is controlled by DIx,
DIy respectively. Terminal function set as below.
- 120 -
DIx 1 Running
DIy 2 (FWD/REV)
DIn 3 Three-line control mode 1
(1) When need to run, must be closed DIn terminals first, implemented by DIx or DIy pulse rising to
realize the motor forward or reverse control;
(2) When need to stop, it should be done by disconnect DIn terminal signal;
(3) The DIx, DIy, DIn is DI1 ~ DI5, HDI1 multi-function digital quantity input terminals, DIx, DIy for
pulse effectively, the DIn of level effectively;
SB1 Three-line control
DIn
model 1
SB2
DIx FWD
SB3
DIy REV
Digital command
COM
end
External circuit VicRuns

Fig 6-11 Three-line control mode 1
SB1: Stop button SB2: Forward rotation button SB3: Forward rotation button
Three-line control mode 2: In this mode, Dln is enabled terminal, and the run command is given by
DIx, while the direction is determined by the status of DIy. Terminal function as below:
DIx 1 Running
DIy 2 (FWD/REV)
DIn 3 Three-line control mode 2
(1) When need to run, must be closed DIn terminals first, produced by DIx pulse rising along the
motor run signals, DIy status produce motor rotating direction signals.
(2) When need to stop, it should be done by disconnect DIn terminal signal.
(3) The DIx, DIy, DIn is DI1 ~ DI5, HDI1 multi-function input terminals, DIx for pulse effectively, DIy,
DIn for level effectively.
Fig 6-12 Three-line control mode 2

SB1: Stop button SB2: Run button K: forward/reverse switchover
Alternative control mode: this mode Din as enabled terminal, run and the rotating direction and stop
are separately controlled by Din DIy alternatively. Terminal function as below:
- 121 -
Dix 1 Forward, stop
DIy 2 Reverse, stop
DIn 3 Alternative control mode
Din terminal must be closed before operating, the initial pulse rising by DI x DIy to control motor
forward or reverse rotating, the second pulse rising to control stop, and such repeat operation to
control inverter start/ stop. Note: DIx or DIy as start signal and meanwhile as direction signal, if as
stop signal then the effect is the same. As for the first time after the electricity through DIx terminal to
make it produce a pulse let inverter is run, the need to stop when the second pulse can be produced
by DIx delay can also be produced by the DIy, the third pulse will delay let inverter is up and run, run
direction by a third impulse signal is produced DIx or pulse produced by DIy.
At the same time, through disconnect DIn terminal signal can also achieve the downtime control
frequency converter.
Among them, the DIx, DIy, DIn is DI1 ~ DI5, HDI1 multi-function digital quantity input terminals, DIx,
DIy for pulse effectively, the DIn of level effectively.
Fig 6-13 Alternate control mode

SB1: Stop button, SB2: FWD, STOP button, SB3: REV, Stop button
Back and forth control mode: Din is encode terminal, Dix, DIy is reverse control terminal. Terminal
function as below:
Dix 1 Forward, stop
DIy 2 Reverse, stop

DIn 3 Back and forth control mode
Din terminal must be closed before operating, then motor will run according to the previous memories
direction (initial running default forward), when receiving the Dix or DIy pulse rising single, the motor
will reverse running relative to before running direction, interval time more than the time set by F5-63,
receive the Dix or DIy pulse rising single again, the motor will reverse again, and that cycle repeats.
Fig 6-14 Back and forth control mode

- 122 -
DI1 Terminal Function

F5-01 1 ◎
Selection

F5-02 2 ◎
Selection

F5-03 4 ◎
Selection
0~53, see table blow
F5-04 6 ◎
Selection

F5-05 8 ◎
Selection
HDI1 Terminal Function
F5-06 0 ◎
Selection
This parameter is used to set the functions of the multifunctional digital input terminals.
Set
Value
The terminals not being used can be set “no function”, to avoid
0 No function
wrong operation.
1 Forward running
Via external terminals to control inverter forward reverse run
2 Reverse running
Via this terminal to confirm the inverter run mode is 3line run or
3 Three-line run control alternative control mode. Refer to the function code F5-00
(“terminal command mode”) description.
4 Forward Jog(FJOG) FJOG is jog forward run, RJOG is jog reverse run. Jog run
frequency, jog Acceleration/down time refer to function code
5 Reverse Jog(RJOG) Fb-00, Fb-01, Fb-02 description.
Inverter block output, at present motor stop is not controlled by

6 Coast to stop inverter. This method is the same as F1-08 described coast to
stop.
Inverter deceleration stop, but all run parameter is in memory

state. Such as PLC parameters, swing frequency parameters,
7 Run pause
PID parameters. After this terminal signal disappears, inverter
back to running state before the parking.
Using terminal function to reset error, the same function as

8 Fault reset (RESET) keypad RESET. This function can realize long distance error
reset.
When external error signal pulse sent to inverter, inverter alarm

error Err.17, and according to the fault protection action
9 External fault input
approach to trouble shooting (details refer to the function code
F9-36).
External fault normally After the external fault normally closed signal into frequency
10
closed input inverter, inverter report fault Err.17 and downtime.
- 123 -
Frequency setting
11 By external terminal pre-set frequency to change frequency
increase(UP)
up/down command. Setting frequency can be goes up/down
Frequency setting when frequency source setting for the digital setting.
12
decrease(DOWN)
UP/DOWN setting When frequency preset is digital preset, the terminal can clear
13 clear terminal UP/DOWN or keypad UP/DOWN to change frequency,
(Terminal, keyboard) to make given frequency back to F0-09 set value.
Used for switch to select a different frequency source. Select

function code (F0-05) settings according to frequency source,
Switching frequency
14 when set to switch between two frequency sources as frequency
source
source, the terminal is used to implement switch in the two kinds
of frequency source.
Frequency source A
The terminal is effective, the frequency source A replaced by
15 switching with preset
preset frequency (F0-09).
frequency
Frequency source B
The terminal is effective, the frequency source B replaced by
16 switching with preset
preset frequency (F0-09).
frequency
17 MS speed terminal 1
18 MS speed terminal 2 It can realize 16S speed through the combination of digital
status of these four terminals. Refer attached table 1 for the 16
19 MS speed terminal 3 MS speed function and other 16 commands.
20 MS speed terminal 4
Acceleration/decelerat
21 ion time selection
terminal 1 It can realize 4 kinds of acceleration/deceleration time selection
Acceleration/decelerat through the 4 states of two terminals.
22 ion time selection
terminal 2
PULSE frequency
23 (Only effective for HDI1 as the function of the pulse input terminals.
HDI1)
Used to switch between the keypad control and terminal control.

Control command If command source selection for the keypad control, then switch
24
switch terminal 1 system for terminal control when terminal is effective; vice
versa.
Used to switch between the terminal control and communication

Control command control. If command source selection for the terminal control,
25
switch terminal 2 then switch system for communication control when terminal is
effective; vice versa.
This terminal is valid, and the inverter directly switchover to the

26 Immediate DC braking
DC braking state.
Deceleration DC The terminal is valid, slow down to stop inverter and DC braking
27
braking starting frequency, and then switchover to DC braking state.
- 124 -
External stop terminal Can use the terminal to make inverter downtime when the
28 1 (Only effective for keypad control, equivalent to the STOP key function on the
keypad control) keypad.
In any control mode (panel control, terminal control,
External stop terminal
communication control), can use the terminal to make the
29 2 (According to the
frequency inverter deceleration and stop, then the deceleration
deceleration time 4)
time fixed for deceleration time 4 at this time.
30 Emergency stop The terminal is enabled, inverter stop at Fb-09 set time.
PID temporary failure, the inverter to maintain the current output

31 PID pause
frequency, the PID adjustment of frequency source no longer.
When terminal is valid, then the integral regulating function of

32 PID integral pause PID suspended, but the proportion adjustment and the
differential adjustment function of PID is still valid.
Reverse PID action The terminal is valid, PID action direction and the direction of
33
direction FA-03 set is opposite.
When PID parameter switching condition is DI terminal

PID parameter (FA-18=1), and the terminal is invalid, PID parameter using the
34
switching FA-05~FA-07; when terminal is valid, then use the
FA-15~FA-17.
PID temporary failure, the inverter to maintain the current output

35 PLC pause
frequency, the PID adjustment of frequency source no longer.
PLC is suspended in the process of execute, can make inverter

36 PLC state reset back to initial state of simple PLC through the terminal when run
again.
Swing frequency The inverter output at center frequency, swing frequency

37
pause function pause.
The inverter output at center frequency, swing frequency

38 Swing frequency reset
function valid.
Make inverter switching between torque control and speed
Switching between
control. When the terminal is invalid, the inverter running on the
39 speed control and
defined mode of A0-00 (speed/torque control mode); when the
torque control
terminal is valid, then switch to another mode.
Prohibited inverter for torque control, inverter into speed control
40 Torque control prohibit
mode.
Acceleration/decelerat Ensure the inverter is not affected by external signal (except halt
41
ion prohibit command), to maintain the current output frequency.
42 Reverse prohibit Motor reverse is not allowed.
If the function is set to effectively, when frequency is changed,

Frequency
43 the inverter is not response the frequency change, until the
modification prohibit
terminal state is invalid.
44 Counter input Count input terminal of pulse.
45 Counter reset To reset the counter status.
46 Length count input The input terminal of length count.
- 125 -
47 Length reset Reset length.
Through four kinds of condition of two terminals, can realize four

Motor selection
48 groups of motor parameters switch, the detailed content see
terminal
table 3.
50 User-defined failure 1 When the user-defined fault 1 and 2 is valid, the inverter
respectively alarm Err. 35 and Err. 36, the inverter will be based
51 User-defined failure 2 on the fault protection action to select the action mode selected
by the F9-38.
When the terminal is valid, the running time of the inverter is

Cleared the running
52 cleared, and the function needs to be used in conjunction with
time
the time (Fb-38) and the running time (Fb-33).
Switching between If the current is two line control mode, the terminal is valid,
two-line and three-line switch to the three control mode; if the current is three line
53
mode (Switch is control mode, the terminal is valid, switch to two line control
invalid in running) mode.
Unit’s digit: DI1

1: Low level effective
DI1 Terminal Valid
F5-10 Ten’s digit: DI2, same as above 0x00000 ◎
Mode Selection 1
Hundred’s digit: DI3, same as above
Thousand’s digit: DI4, same as above
Ten thousand’s digit: DI5, same as above
Unit’s digit: HDI1

DI1 Terminal Valid 1: Low level effective
F5-11 0x0000 ◎
Mode Selection 2 Ten’s digit: reserved
Used to set the valid state model of digital quantity input terminal.
When selection for high level is valid, the corresponding DI terminal is valid connected with the COM,
and is invalid disconnection.
When selection for low level is valid, the corresponding DI terminal is invalid connected with the COM,
and is valid disconnection.
F5-12 DI Filter Time 0.000s~1.000s 0.010s ○
Set the software filter time of DI terminal state. If the input terminal of the usa occasion is easy to be
interfered an caused by the wrong action, the parameter can be increased to enhance the
anti-interference ability. But the filter time increases can cause DI terminal response slow.
F5-13 DI1 Close Delay Time 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ◎

F5-16 DI1 Open Delay Time 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ◎
- 126 -
Is used to set DI terminal state changes, delay time of the frequency inverter for the change.
Only DI1, DI2, DI3 have the function that set the delay time at present.
Terminal UP/DOWN
F5-19 0.001Hz/s~65.535Hz/s 1.000Hz/s ○
change rate
Used to set the terminal UP/DOWN to adjust the setting frequency, the speed of frequency change,
that is the frequency variation per second.
When F0-15 (frequency decimal point) is 2, the value range is from 0.001Hz/s to 65.535Hz/s.
When F0-15 (frequency decimal point) is 1, the value range is from 0.01Hz/s to 655.35Hz/s
Unit’s digit: AI1 curve selection

F5-20 AI Curve Selection 4: Curve 4 (4 point, see b2~00-b2-07) 0x321 ○
5: Curve 5 (4 point, see b2-08~b2-15)
Ten’s digit: AI2 curve selection, same as
above
The unit’s digit and ten’s digit of function code are used to select respectively, the analog input AI1,
AI2 corresponding set curve, each analog input can choose any one of 5 kinds of curves.
Curve 1, 2, 3 are 2 point curve, set in the F5 group function code, and the curve 4 and 5 are 4 points,
need to set in the function code in group b2.
VD520 inverter standard unit provides 2 way analog input port.
Unit’s digit: AI1 is lower than min input
setting selection
0: Corresponding to the min input
AI is Lower than Min setting
F5-21 0X000 ○
Input Setting Selection 1: 0.0%
Ten’s digit: AI2 is lower than min input
setting selection, same as above
The function code is used for setting, when the voltage of the analog input is smaller than the
“minimum input” set, how to determine the setting of analog corresponds.
The unit’s digit and ten’s digit of function code are corresponding analog input AI1, AI2 respectively.
If selection is 0, when the AI input is lower than the “minimum input”, then the analog corresponding
setting for “minimum input corresponding setting” of function code to determine the curve (F5-27,
F5-22).
If selection is 1, when the AI input is lower than the minimum input, then the analog corresponding
setting is set to 0.0%.
F5-22 AI Curve 1 Min Input -10.00V~F5-24 0.00V ○
Corresponding Setting of
F5-23 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○
AI Curve 1 Min Input
F5-24 AI Curve 1 Max Input F5-22~+10.00V 10.00V ○
- 127 -
F5-25 -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○
AI Curve 1 Max Input
The above function code is used to set the relationship between the analog input voltage and the
setting value of the representative.
When the analog input voltage is greater than the set “maximum input” (F5-24), the analog voltage is
caculated according to the “Maximum input”; similarly, when the analog input voltage is less than the
set “maximum input” (F5-22), depending on the “AI is lower than the minmum input set selection”
(F5-21) settings, with the minimum input or 0.0% calculation.
When analog input for the current input, 1mA current equivalent to a 0.5V voltage.
AI1 input filter time, used to set AI1 software filter time, when the on-site analog is easily effected,
then increase filter time to make detecting analog signal getting steady. But the filter time is bigger,
the analog signal detecting response speed is lower. Please consider the actual situation to set.
In different application, analog set 100.0% is different from its corresponding nominal value, please
refer to application description. Fig 6-15 is two typical setting situation:
Setup frequency Setup frequency

or torque or torque
100% 100%
AI AI
0V/0mA 0V/0mA
10V/20mA 10V/20mA
-100%
Fig.6-15 Corresponding Relationship between Analog Reference and Setting
F5-28 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○
F5-30 -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○
The function and using method of curve 2, please refer to the insctructions of curve 1.
F5-33 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○
- 128 -
F5-35 -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○
The function and using method of curve 3, please refer to the instructions of curve 1.
F5-37 Pulse Min Input 0.00kHz~F5-39 0.00kHz ○
F5-38 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○
Pulse Min Input
F5-39 Pulse Max Input F5-37~100.00kHz 50.00kHz ○
F5-40 -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○
Pulse Max Input
F5-41 PULSE Filter Time 0.00s~10.00s 0.10s ○
The group function code is used to set the relationship between HDI1 pulse frequency set and
corresponding setting.
Pulse frequency can only be input into the inverter through the HDI1 channel.
The application of the group is simlar to the curve 1, please refer to the instructions of curve 1.
F5-42 Travel Switch Lock Time 0.00s~10.00s 1.00s ○
It used to terminal control operation mode 5 (back and forth control), please refer to the specific
instructions of back and forth control mode.
- 129 -
F6 Output Terminal Function Group

HDO1 Terminals Output 0: Pulse output
F6-00 0 ○
Mode Selection 1: Switch signal output
HDO1 terminal is programmable multiplexing terminal. It can be used as high-speed pulse output
terminal, it can also be used as collector open circuit output terminal.
When as a pulse output, the highest frequency of the output pulse is 100kHz, related functions refer
to the instruction of F6-12.
HDO1 Output Terminals

F6-01 0 ○
Function Selection
Relay T1 Function
F6-02 0 ○
Selection
0~41, see table blow
Relay T2 Function
F6-03 0 ○
Selection
DO1 Output Terminal
F6-04 0 ○
Function Selection
Digit output terminal function table:

Set
Value
0 No output Output terminals without any function.
It indicate the inverter is in running state, have the output

1 Inverter in running
frequency( can be zero), output ON signal at this time.
When the inverter main circuit and control loop is stable, and the
2 Ready for run inverter is not detected any fault information, and the inverter is in
the running sate, output ON signal.
Fault output 1
When the inverter is failure (except when the fault protection
3 (continue running
action is continue operation), output ON signal.
without output)
Fault output 2 (don’t When the inverter is failure (except when undervoltage or fault
4
output undervoltage) protection action is continue operation), output ON signal.
Warning output
5 When the inverter is failure, output ON signal.
(output when fault)
6 Output undervoltage When the inverter is in undervoltage condition, output ON signal.
Frequency level
7 detection FDT1 Please refer to the instruction of function code Fb-16, Fb-17.
output
Frequency level
8 detection FDT2 Please refer to the instruction of function code Fb-18, Fb-19.
output
9 Frequency reached Please refer to the instruction of function code Fb-20.
Frequency 1 reached
10 Please refer to the instruction of function code Fb-21, Fb-22.
output
- 130 -
Frequency 2 reached
output
Zero speed running When frequency inverter is running and the output frequency is 0,
12 1 (no output when then output ON signal. When inverter is in a state of downtime,
stop) the signal is OFF.
Zero speed running When frequency inverter is running and the output frequency is 0,
13 2 (output when then output ON signal. When inverter is in a state of downtime,
stop) the signal also is ON.
Frequency upper When operation frequency reach to the upper limit frequency,
14
limit reached output ON signal.
Frequency lower When operation frequency reach to the lower limit frequency,
15 limit reached (about output ON signal. When inverter is in a state of downtime, the
running) signal is OFF.
Frequency lower When operation frequency reach to the lower limit frequency,
16 limit reached (output output ON signal. When inverter is in a state of downtime, the
when stop) signal also is ON.
Current 1 reached
output
Current 2 reached
output
19 Zero current state Please refer to the instruction of function code Fb-25, Fb-26.
Output current limit

exceeded
Before overload protection, according to the overload forecasting

Motor overload warning threshold value to judge, after more than forecasting
21
pre-alarm warning threshold output ON signal. Parameter set refer to the
function code F8-00~F8-02.
Inverter overload
22 In the first 10s in inverter overload protection, output ON signal.
pre-alarm
23 During the load When frequency inverter during the load, output ON signal.
Set Count value When the count value reach to the set value of Fb-59, output ON
24
reached signal.
Designated count When the count value reach to the set value of Fb-60, output ON
25
value reached signal. Count function refer to the function instruction of Fb group.
When the actural length of testing more than Fb-56 setting length,
26 Length reached
output ON signal.
Radiator temperature of inverter module (FF-11) meet the module

Module temperature
27 settings of the temperature reaches the value (Fb-39), output ON
reached
signal.
Current running time When frequency inverter current running time more than the
29
reached setting time of Fb-33, output ON signal.
Accumulative When frequency inverter accumulative running time more than

30
running time reached the setting time of Fb-35, output ON signal.
- 131 -
Accumulative
When frequency inverter accumulative power-on time more than
31 power-on time
the setting time of Fb-35, output ON signal.
reached
Timing reached When timing function selection (Fb-36) is valid, afrer inverter
32
outpu running time reach to set timing time, output ON signal.
PLC circulation When simple PLC operation to finished a cycle, output a pulse
33
output signal whit 250ms width.
When set frequency exceed frequency upper limit or frequency

34 Frequency limit lower limit, and the inverter output frequency reaches frequency
upper limit or frequency lower limit, output ON signal.
Inverter in speed control mode, when output torque reaches the

35 Torque limit torque limit value, the inverter in the stall protection state, output
ON signal at the same time time.
36 Reverse running When frequency inverter in reverse running, output ON signal.
When the value of analog input AI1 is more than Fb-41 (AI1 input
37 AI1 input limit protection upper limit) or less than Fb-40 (AI1 input protection
lower limit), output ON signal.
When the value of analog input AI1 is more than the input value of
38 AI1>AI2
AI2, output ON signal.
Communication
39 Please refer to the communication protocol.
setting
Timing braking
(power on braking)
Inverter in running Said the inverter is in running state, have the output frequency
42
(jog no output) (can be zero), except jog, then output ON signal.
Unit’s digit: HDO1

0: Positive logic
1: Oppositive logic
DO Output Terminal Ten’s digit: RELAY1, same as above
F6-06 0x00000 ○
Effective State Selection Hundred’s digit: RELAY 2, same as
above
Thousand’s digit: DO1, same as above
Define HDO1 (digital output), relay 1, relay 2 and DO1 output logic.
0: Positive logic, digital output terminal and the corresponding piplic end connected to valid state,
disconnect as invalid state;
1: Anti-logic, digital output terminal and the corresponding public end connected as the invalid state,
disconnect for valid state.
F6-07 HDO1 Closing Delay 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
F6-08 T1 Closing Delay 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
- 132 -
F6-09 T2 Closing Delay 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
F6-10 DO1 Closing Delay 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
F6-11 DO5 Closing Delay 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Set the closing delay time of output terminal HDO1, relay 1, relay 2, DO1 and DO5 from the state to
change to the actual output changes.
HDO1 Output Function

F6-12 0 ○
Selection
AO1 Output Function

F6-13 0~15, see table below 0 ○
Selection
AO2 Output Function

F6-14 1 ○
Selection
Analog output AO1 and AO2 output range is 0V~10V or 0/4mA~20mA. HDO1 terminal output pulse
frequency range is 0.01kHz~F6-15(output max frequency when HDO1 pulse output mode), F6-15
can be set from 0.01kHz~100.00kHz. Pulse or analog signal output 0.0%~100.0% corresponding
function as below table:
Set
value
0 Running frequency 0~maximum output frequency
1 Set frequency 0~maximum output frequency
2 Output current 0~2 times of rated motor current

3 Output torque 0~2 times of rated motor voltage
4 Output power 0~2 times of rated power
5 Output voltage 0~1.2 times of inverter rated power
PULSE input (100%

6 corresponding 0.01kHz~100.00kHz
100.0kHz)
7 AI1 0V~10V
8 AI2 0V~10V (Or 0~20mA)
9 Reserved Reserved
10 Length 0~maximum set length
11 Count value 0~Max count value
Communication
12 0.0%~100.0%
setting
13 Motor rotate speed 0~maximum output frequency corresponding rotate speed

When≤55Kw, 100% corresponding 100.00A; when >55kW, 100%
14 Output current
corresponding 1000.0A
15 Output voltage 0.0V~1000.0V
- 133 -
HDO1 Output Max

F6-15 0.01kHz~100.00kHz 50.00kHz ○
Frequency
When selecting HDO1 terminals as pulse output, the function code is used to select the maximum
frequency value of the output pulse.
AO1 Output Voltage
F6-16 0.00V~10.00V 0.00V ○
Lower Limit
Corresponding Setting
F6-17 Value of AO1 Output 0.0%~F6-19 0.0% ○
Voltage Lower Limit
AO1 Output Voltage

F6-18 0.00V~10.00V 10.00V ○
Upper Limit
F6-19 Value of AO1 Output F6-17~100.0% 100.0% ○
Voltage Upper Limit
F6-20 AO1 Output Filter Time 0.00s~10.00s 0.00s ○
AO2 Output Voltage

F6-21 0.00V~10.00V 0.00V ○
Lower Limit
F6-22 Value of AO2 Output 0.0%~F6-24 0.0% ○
Voltage Lower Limit
AO2 Output Voltage

F6-23 0.00V~10.00V 10.00V ○
Upper Limit
F6-24 Value of AO2 Output F6-22~100.0% 100.0% ○
Voltage Upper Limit
F6-25 AO2 Output Filter Time 0.00s~10.00s 0.00s ○
The function code used to set the relation of analog output voltage and its representing set value.
When AO1, AO2 output is the current output, 1mA current is equal to 0.5V voltage, so 20mA current
equal to10V.
When AO1, AO2 output is current output, it is suggested to add external resistor with less than 500Ω.
0: Voltage
F6-26 AO1 Output Mode 0 ○
1: Current
0: Voltage
F6-27 AO2 Output Mode 0 ○
1: Current
AO1 and AO2 has two modes of voltage and current output, at the same time, the corresponding
output type of hardware is selected, and the corresponding parameters are selected for the same
type.
- 134 -
F6-28 HDO1 Disconnect Delay 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
F6-29 T1 Disconnect Delay 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
F6-30 T2 Disconnect Delay 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
F6-31 DO1 Disconnect Delay 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
F6-32 DO5 Disconnect Delay 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Set the closing delay time of output terminal HDO1, relay 1, relay 2, DO1 and DO5 from the state to
change to the actual output changes.
- 135 -
F7 Keyboard and Display Function Group

0: Invalid
1: Operation panel command channel
switching with remote command
channel (terminal command channel or
JOG / REV Key Function communication command channel)
F7-00 3 ◎
Selection 2: FWD/REV switching
3: Forward jog
4: Reverse jog
5: Rapid debugging
JOG/REV keys for the multi-function key, can be set by the function code JOG/REV key functions.
This key can be used to switch in stop and running.
0: This key invalid
1: Operation panel command channel switching with remote command channel
Refer to the command source switching, namely panel command source switching with
communication command source. If current command source is keypad control, then the key function
is valid.
2: FWD/REV switching
The direction of frequency command is switched by JOG/REV key. The funtion is valid only in the
command source for the operation panel command channel.
3: Forward jog
Through the keypad JOG/REV key to realize forward jog.
4: Reverse jog
Through the keypad JOG/REV key to realize reverse jog.
5: Rapid debugging
Through the keypad JOG/REV key to switch to the rapid debug interface, the specific interface
content reference FF-05 parameter description.
0: STOP/RES key stop function is valid
STOP/RESET Key only in keypad operation mode
F7-01 1 ○
Function 1: STOP/RES key stop function all valid
in any operation mode
This parameter is used to set the function selection of STOP/RESET key.

Remark: the “RESET” is always valid for the reset function, regardless of the value of the parameter
settings.
0000~0xFFFF
Bit00: Running frequency (Hz)
Bit01: Setting frequency (Hz)
Bit03: Output voltage (V)
LED Running Display
F7-02 Bit04: Output current (A) 0x001F ○
Parameter 1
Bit05: Output power (kW)
Bit06: Output torque (%)
- 136 -

Bit11: Reserved
Bit12: Count value
Bit13: Length value
Bit14: Load speed display
BIT15: PID setting
0000~0xFFFF
Bit00: PID feedback
Bit01: PLC stage
Bit02: PULSE input frequency (kHz)
Bit03: Running frequency 2 (Hz)
Bit04: Set torque (0.%)
Bit05: Voltage before AI1 correction (V)
Bit06: Voltage before AI2 correction (V)
LED Running Display
Parameter 2
Bit08: Line speed
Bit09: Current power on time (Hour)
Bit10: Current running time (Min)
Bit11: PULSE input frequency (Hz)
Bit12: Communication setting value
Bit13: Reserved
Bit14: Main frequency X display (Hz)
Bit15: Auxiliary frequency Y display (Hz)
Inverter in run condition, parameter display is subjected to the function code, which is a 16 bit binary
number, if one bit is 1, the corresponding parameters of the bit at run time, can see through the shift
key. If the bit is 0, then the corresponding parameters will not be displayed. The lower the bit is, the
higher the display priority is.
Comparison table of operating display low bit Comparison table of operating display low bit
F7-02 F7-03
Corresponding display Corresponding display

Hexadecimal Hexadecimal
parameter parameter
Running
0x0001 PID feedback 0x0001
frequency(Hz)
Set frequency(Hz) 0x0002 PLC stage 0x0002
PULSE input pulse

Bus voltage(V) 0x0004 0x0004
frequency
Output voltage(V) 0x0008 Running frequency 0x0008
Output current(A) 0x0010 Set torque (%) 0x0010
AI1 voltage before

Output power (kW) 0x0020 0x0020
correction (V)
AI2 voltage before

Output torque (%) 0x0040 0x0040
correction (V)
- 137 -
DI input state 0x0080 Reserved 0x0080
DO output state 0x0100 Linear velocity 0x0100
Current power on time

AI1 voltage (V) 0x0200 0x0200
(Hour)
Current running time

AI2 voltage (V) 0x0400 0x0400
(Min)
PULSE input
Reserved 0x0800 0x0800
frequency (Hz)
Communication set
Count value 0x1000 0x1000
value
Encoder feedback
Length value 0x2000 0x2000
speed (Hz)
Main frequency A
Load speed display 0x4000 0x4000
display (Hz)
Auxiliary frequency B
PID setting 0x8000 0x8000
display (Hz)
If you want to show multiple parameters (switch by shift key display), only to input hexadecimal
addition results of that several parameter.
0000~0x3FFF
Bit00: Set frequency (Hz)
LED Display Stop
Parameter
Bit07: Count value
Bit08: Length value
Bit09: PLC stage
Bit10: Load speed
Bit11: PID setting
Bit12: Pulse input frequency (kHz)
Bit13: Set torque (0.1%)
Inverter in stop state, the parameters according to the function code, which is a 16 bit binary number,
if one is 1, then the corresponding parameters can be during downtime, can see through the shift key.
If the bit is 0, then the corresponding parameters will not be displayed. The lower bits, the higher the
display priority is. Please refer to the operation display parameters detailed setting method.
Stop display parameter F7-04 corresponding table
Corresponding display parameter Hexadecimal
Set frequency (Hz on) 0x0001
Bus voltage (V on) 0x0002
- 138 -
Input terminal state 0x0004
Output terminal state 0x0008
PID given value (% flash) 0x0010
PID feedback value (% on) 0x0020
Torque set value (% on) 0x0040
Analog AI1 value (V on) 0x0080
Analog AI2 value (V on) 0x0100
Reserved 0x0200
HS pulse HDI frequency 0x0400
PLC & MS speed current stage 0x0800
Pulse count value 0x1000
User-defined speed 1 (set value) 0x2000
User-defined speed 2 (set value) 0x4000
If you want to show multiple parameters (switch by shift key display), only to input hexadecimal
addition results of that several parameter.
The Second Line LED 0~15 corresponding bit0~bit15 of F7-03

F7-05 Running Display 16~31 corresponding bit0~bit15 of 4 ○
Parameters F7-04
The Second Line LED

F7-06 0~13 corresponding bit0~bit13 of F7-05 1 ○
Stop Display Parameters
When use the double line show keyboard, can select a display value by these two parameters, but the
function is the decimal input.
Load Speed Display

F7-07 0.000s~6.5000 1.0000 ○
Coefficient

Load Speed Display 1: 1 bit decimal place
F7-08 1 ○
Decimal Places 2: 2 bit decimal place
When need to display the load speed, should adjust the corresponding relation of inverter output
frequency and load speed.
Below illustrates the calculation of load speed:
If load speed display coefficient F7-07 is 2.000, the load speed decimal digits F7-08 to 2 (two decimal
point), when inverter running frequency for 40.00Hz, load speed is: 40.00*2.000=80.00 (two decimal
point display).
If the inverter in a stop state, the load speed display for set frequency corresponding to the speed,
namely “setting load speed”. At a set frequency of 50.00Hz for example, the stop state load speed is:
50.00*2.000=100.00 (two decimal point display).
- 139 -
F8 Protection Parameters
Motor 1 Overload 0: Disabled
F8-00 1 ○
Protection Selection 1 : Enabled
Motor 1 Overload
F8-01 0.20~10.00 1.00 ○
Protection Gain
F8-00=1: no motor overload protection function, there may be a motor overheating damage risk,
suggest adding thermal relay between inverter and motor.
F8-00=1: inverter according to the motor overload protection inverse time curve detemine whether the
motor overload at this moment.
Inverse time curves of the motor overload protection are as follows: 220% X (F8-01) X rated motor
current, last 1 minute alarm motor overload fault; 150% X (F8-01) X rated motor current, last 60
minutes alarm motor overload.
User needs according to the actural overload capacity of motor, set up the F8-01 value correctly, if set
the parameter is too big easy to cause the damage of motor overheating, and inverter is not alarm.
Motor 1 Overload
F8-02 50%~100% 80% ○
Warning Coefficient
This function is used to in the front of the motor overload fault protection, through the DO give a
warning signal to control system. The warning coefficient used to detemine how much to warning
before the motor overload protection. The greater the value, the smaller the warning advance.
When the inverter output current cumulants is greater than the product of overload inverse time curve
with F8-02, inverter multi-function digital DO output the “motor overload warning” ON signal.
Motor 2 Overload 0: Disabled

F8-03 1 ○
Protection Selection 1: Enabled
Motor 2 Overload
F8-04 0.20~10.00 1.00 ○
Protection Gain
Motor 2 Overload
F8-05 50%~100% 80% ○
Pre-alarm Coefficient
Same as motor 1 overload protection parameter.
Overvoltage /over current 0: Mode 0 ≤11kW: 1

F8-06 ◎
Stall Mode Selection 1: Mode 1 >11kW: 0
Overvoltage Stall 0: Disabled

F8-07 10 ○
Proportion Gain 1~100
Overvoltage Stall Integral

F8-08 0~100 5 ○
Gain
Overvoltage Stall 380VAC: 700.0VDC

F8-09 100.0VDC~800.0VDC ○
Protection voltage 220VAC: 370.0VDC
In the process of frequency converter to slow down, when DC bus voltage more than the overvoltage
stall protection voltage, frequency converter to stop deceleration to keep on the current running
frequency, after waiting for bus voltage drops to continue to deceleration.
Overvoltage stall gain, used to adjust in the process of deceleration, inverter overvoltage control
capability. The biger the value is, the greater the inhibition of overvoltage ability is. On the premise of
not occur overvoltage, the gain settings as small as possible.
For small inertia load, the gain of the overvoltage stall is small is better, otherwise the system dynamic
- 140 -
response is slow. For large inertia load, this value should be larger, otherwise the supppression effect
is not good, may apppear overvoltage fault.
When overvoltage stall gain is set to 0, cancel the function of overvoltage stall.
Over current Stall 0: Disabled

F8-10 20 ○
Proportion Gain 1~1000
Over current Stall Integral

F8-11 0~1000 20 ○
Gain
Over current Stall

F8-12 100%~200% 160% ○
Protection Current
Quick Start Over current

F8-13 0~100 30 ○
Suppression Gain
In process of inverter acceleration/deceleration, when output current more than overcurrent stall
protection current, frequency converter to stop deceleration process, keep the current running
frequency, after the output current drops tocontinue to acceleration/deceleration.
Overcurrent stall gain, used to adjust in the process of acceleration/deceleration, frequency converter
overcurrent control capability. The biger the value is, the greater the inhibition of overcrrent ability is.
On the premise of not occur overcurrent, the gain settings as small as possible.
For small inertia load, the gain of the overcurrent stall is small is better, otherwise the system dynamic
response is slow. For large inertia load, this value should be larger, otherwise the supppression effect
is not good, may apppear overcurrent fault.
When overcurrent stall gain is set to 0, cancel the function of overcurrent stall..
Short-circuit to Ground 0: Invalid

F8-14 1 ○
Upon Power-on 1: Valid
Can select the inverter in the power, to detect wether the motor is short circuit to ground.
If this function is effective, then inverter UVW terninal will have voltage output after power on a period
of time.
Input Phase Loss 0: Disabled

F8-15 1 ○
Protection Selection 1: Enabled
Selecte whether to protect the intput phase loss.

Just G type 11 kW and above power of VD520 inverter have the input phase loss protection function,
P type machine under the power of 7.5 kW, regardless of F8-13 set to 0 or 1 no input phase protection
function.
Output Phase Loss 0: Disabled

F8-16
Protection Selection
1 ○
1: Enabled
Select whether to protect the output phase loss.
Offload Protection 0: Invalid

F8-17 0 ○
Selection 1: Valid
F8-18 Offload Detection Level 0.0~100.0% 10.0% ○
F8-19 Offload Detection Time 0.0s~60.0s 1.0s ○
If offload protection function is effective, then when the inverter output current is less than the loffoad
detection levels F8-18 and duration time is greater than the offload detection time F8-19, the inverter
output frequency decreased to 7% of the rated frequency automatically. During the offload protection,
if the load recovery, then frequency inverter automatic recovery to run according to set ferquency.
- 141 -
Action Selection Upon 0: Invalid

F8-24 Instantaneous Power 1: Decelerate 0 ○
Failure 2: Decelerate to stop
Voltage Restore
Judgment Value Upon
F8-25 F0-10~100.0% 90.0% ○
Instantaneous Power
Failure
Voltage Restore
Judgment Time Upon
F8-26 0.00s~100.00s 0.50s ○
Instantaneous Power
Failure
Voltage Judgment Value

F8-27 Upon Instantaneous 60.0%~100.0% (Standard bus voltage) 80.0% ○
Power Failure
The function is refers to the instantaneous power failure or voltage falls suddenly, frequency converter
by reducing output rotational speed, reduce the load feedback energy compensation inverter DC bus
voltage is reduced, to keep the inverter to continue to run.
If F8-24 =1, when instantaneous power failure or voltage falls suddenly, frequency converter
deceleration, when the bus voltage returns to normal, inverter normal acceleration to set frequency
operation. Is used as the basis of bus voltage return to normal is bus voltage more than F8-25 set
voltage recovery judging value and duration time more than F8-26 set time. If F8-24=2, when
instantaneous power failure or voltage falls suddenly, inverter deceleration until the stop.
Instantaneous power voltage
Instantaneous pick up judgment time
power failure F8-26
judgment voltage Bus voltage
F8-25
Instantaneous
power failure
action judgment
voltage F8-27
Running
frequency
（F8-24=1：deceleration）
Time
Running
frequency Deceleration time 1
Acceleration time 1
（F8-24=2：Decelerate to Stop time）
Time
Deceleration time 1
Fig 6-16 Schematic diagram of instantaneous power failure
- 142 -
Maximum Change of V/F 0: No limit

F8-28 800 ○
Over Voltage Stall 1~30000
Used to adjust the output variation during the overvoltage stall.
F9 Fault Record and Setting Parameter Group

Fault Types for the First
F9-00 - ●
Time
Fault Types for the

F9-01 0~43 - ●
Second Time
Fault Types for the Third

F9-02 - ●
Time (Last Time)
Record recently three failure types of inverter, 0 is no fault. For the possible causes and solutions of
each fault code, please refer to the instructions in chapter 8.
Frequency Upon the

F9-03 Third Time (Last Time) - - ●
Fault
Current Upon the Third

F9-04 - - ●
Time (Last Time) Fault
Bus Voltage Upon the

Fault
Input Terminal State

F9-06 Upon the Third Time - - ●
(Last Time) Fault
Output Terminal State

F9-07 Upon the Third Time - - ●
(Last Time) Fault
F9-08 Inverter State Upon the - - ●

Third Time (Last Time)
- 143 -
Fault
Power on Time Upon the

Fault
Running Time Upon the

F9-10 - - ●
Second Time Fault
Frequency Upon the

F9-13 - - ●
Second Time Fault
Current Upon the Second

F9-14 - - ●
Time Fault

F9-15 - - ●
Second Time Fault

F9-16 Upon the Second Time - - ●
Fault

F9-17 Upon the Second Time - - ●
Fault
Inverter State Upon the

F9-18 - - ●
Second Time Fault

F9-19 - - ●
Second Time Fault

F9-20 - - ●
Second Time Fault
Frequency Upon the First

F9-23 - - ●
Time Fault
Current Upon the First

F9-24 - - ●
Time Fault

F9-25 - ●
First Time Fault

F9-26 - ●
Upon the First Time Fault

F9-27 - - ●
Upon the First Time Fault
Inverter State Upon the

F9-28 - - ●
First Time Fault

F9-29 - - ●
First Time Fault
F9-30 - - ●
First Time Fault
Fault Automatic Reset

F9-33 0~20 0 ○
Times
Fault Automatic Reset

F9-34 0.1s~100.0s 1.0s ○
Interval Time
- 144 -
Fault DO Action 0: No action

F9-35 Selection During the 0 ○
Fault Automatic Reset 1: Action
Unit’s digit: motor overload (11)

0: Coast to stop
2: Continue to run
Ten’s digit: input phase loss (13)
0: Coast to stop
2: Continue to run
Hundred’s digit: output phase loss (14)
0: Coast to stop
Fault Protection Action 0x000
F9-36 1: Stop according to stop mode ○
Selection 1 00
2: Continue to run
Thousand’s digit: external fault (17)
0: Coast to stop
2: Continue to run
Ten thousand’s digit: communication
abnormal (18)
0: Coast to stop
2: Continue to run
Unit’s digit: reserved

Ten’s digit: parameter read-write
abnormal (21)
0: Coast to stop
2: Continue to run
F9-37 Hundred’s digit: running time reached ○
Selection 2 00
(27)
0: Coast to stop
2: Continue to run
Unit’s digit: user-defined fault 1 (35)
0: Coast to stop
F9-38 2: Continue to run ○
Selection 3 00
Ten’s digit: user-defined fault 2 (36)
0: Coast to stop
- 145 -
2: Continue to run
Hundred’s digit: power on time reached
(28)
0: Coast to stop
2: Continue to run
Thousand’s digit: offload (37)
0: Coast to stop
2: Decelerate to 7% of the rated motor
frequency continue running,
automatically restored to the set
frequency operation when no offload
Ten thousand’s digit: PID feedback lost
when running (23)
0: Coast to stop
2: Continue to run
Unit’s digit: Disconnection detection fault

(22)
0: Coast to stop
Fault Protection Action 2: Continue to run 0x000
F9-39 ○
Selection 4 00
Ten’s digit: reserved
When the option is "coast to stop", inverter show Err. * *, and directly downtime.
When the option is "according to the stop way to stop”: inverter show A. * *, and press down way
down, show Err. * * after stop.
When the option is "continue to run" : frequency converter continue to run and displays A. * *, running
frequency is set by F9-40.
0: Run to the current running frequency

Continue Running 1: Run at set frequency
F9-40 Frequency Selection at 2: Run at frequency upper limit 0 ○
Failure 3: Run at frequency lower limit
4: Run at abnormal standby frequency
60.0%~100.0%
Abnormal Standby
F9-41 (100.0% corresponding max frequency 100.0% ○
Frequency
F0-10)
When the inverter malfunction during the operation, and the processing mode of fault is set to
continue to run, frequency converter show A. **, and operation according to the frequency of F9-40
determine.
When operation selecting an anomaly standby frequency, the value set by F9-41 is the percentage
relative to the maximum frequency.
- 146 -
FA Process PID Parameter Group

Process PID closed-loop control is the control mode in the control system using proportion (P),
integral (I) and differential (D) controller of three parts, make the diviation between the feedback value
and the instruction valueis gradually reduced, suitable for the flow rate, pressure, temperature and
other process control.
Proportional control (P)
The control variable of proportional to the deviation.
Integral control (I)
The control variable of proportional to deviation integral value, can eliminate the steady-state error.
Differential control (D)
The control variable of proportional to deviation variation rate, can predict the change trend of
deviation, rapid response to the dramatic changes, improve the dynamic performance, but easy to
introduce and enlarge the interference signals and cause the system unstable, please use caution.
Fig 6-17 Process PID principle block diagram

0: FA-01 setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
FA-00 PID Given Source 0 ○
3: Reserved
4: PULSE setting
- 147 -
6: Multi-reference setting
FA-01 PID Digital Giving 0.0%~100.0% 50.0% ○
This parameter is used to select the target volume for a given channel of process PID.
The set target volume of the process PID for the relative value, set range is 0.0%~0.0%. Similary, the
feedback quantity of PID also is relative quantity, the function of PID is to make the two relatively
equal.
0: A1
1: AI2
2: Reserved
3: AI1-AI2
FA-02 PID Feedback Source 4: PULSE setting 0 ○
6: AI1+AI2
7: MAX (IAI1I, IAI2I)
8: MIN (IAI1I, IAI2I)
This parameter is used to select the feedback signal channel of process PID.
The feedback quantity of process PID is also relative value, setting range is 0.0% ~ 100.0%.
0: Positive action
FA-03 PID Action Direction 0 ○
1: Anti-action
Positive action: when the feedback signal of PID is less than the quantitative, the output frequency of
inverter is increased. Such as the tension control of the winding situation.
Anti-action: when the feedback signal of PID is less than the quantitative, the output frequency of
inverter is decreased. Such as the tension control of the rolling situation.
This function is influenced by the multi-function terminal PID direction invert (function 33), need to pay
attention in the using.
PID Given Feedback

FA-04 0~65535 1000 ○
Range
PID given feedback range is a dimensionless unit for PID given display U0-15 and PID feedback
display U0-16.
The relative value 100.0% of a given feedback of PID corresponding to a given feedback range FA -
04. For example, if the FA - 04 set to 2000, when the PID given 100.0%, PID given show U0-15 is
2000.
FA-05 Proportion Gain Kp1 0.0~100.0 20.0 ○
FA-06 Integral Time Ti1 0.01s~10.00s 2.00s ○
FA-07 Differential Time Td1 0.000s~10.000s 0.000s ○
The proportional gain Kp1

Determine the adjusting strength of the PID regulator, the greater the Kp1, the greater the intensity of
regulation. This parameter 100.0 said when PID feedback quantity and give quantitative deviation are
100.0%, PID regulator to adjust the amplitude of output frequency instructions for maximum
frequency.
Integration time Ti1
Determine the intensity of the PID regulator integral regulation. The shorter the integration time, the
- 148 -
greater the intensity of adjustment. Integration time is when the PID feedback quantity and give
quantitative deviation are 100.0%, integral regulator through the time continuous adjustment, adjust
the quantity to reach the maximum frequency.
Differential time Td1
Determine the intensity of the PID regulator to adjust the deviation change rate. The longer the
differential time, the greater the intensity of regulation. Differential time is when the feedback quantity
in the time to change 100.0%, the regulation quantity of dirrerential controller is maximum frequency.
PID Reverse Cut-off

FA-08 0.00~max frequency 0.00Hz ○
Frequency
In some cases, it is only when the PID output frequency is negative (i.e., frequency converter reverse),
PID is likely to give quantitative and feedback control to the same state, but the high inversion
frequency is not allowed in some situations, FA - 08 used to determine the lower limit of reverse
frequency.
FA-09 PID Deviation Limit 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
When the deviation between the PID quantitative and feedback quantity is less than the FA - 09, PID
stop adjustment action. In this way, the deviation of a given and feedback output frequency is stable
when small, is very effective for some closed-loop control occasions.
FA-10 PID Differential Limiting 0.00%~100.00% 0.10% ○
In PID controller, the effect of differential is more sensitive, easy to cause system oscillation, therefore,
generally limit the effect of differential PID in a smaller range, FA - 10 is used to set the PID differential
output range
FA-11 PID Given Change Time 0.00s~650.00s 0.00s ○
PID given changes time, refers to the PID given value time needed from 0.0% to 100.0%.
When PID given changes, PID given value according to the given time linear changes, reduce
adverse effects caused by given mutations on the system.
FA-12 PID Feedback Filter Time 0.00s~60.00s 0.00s ○
FA-13 PID Output Filter Time 0.00s~60.00s 0.00s ○
FA-12 used to filter the PID feedback, which can reduce the influence of feedback, but leads to the
response performance of the process closed-loop system.
FA-13 used to filter the PID output frequency, the filter will weaken the mutation the of inverter output
frequency, but also leads to the response performance of the process closed-loop system.
FA-15 Proportion Gain Kp2 0.0~100.0 20.0 ○
FA-16 Integral Time Ti2 0.01s~10.00s 2.00s ○
FA-17 Differential Time Td2 0.000s~10.000s 0.000s ○
0: No switching
PID Parameters 1: Switching through DI terminal
FA-18 0 ○
Switching Condition 2: Automatic switching according to the
deviation
PID Parameters
FA-19 0.0%~FA-20 20.0% ○
Switching Deviation 1
PID Parameters
FA-20 A2-19~100.0% 80.0% ○
Switching Deviation 2
- 149 -
In some applications, a set of PID parameters can not meet the needs of the whole operation process,
need to adopt different PID parameters under different conditions.
This set of function is used to switch between two groups of PID parameters.The set mode of
controller parameters FA-15-FA-17 is similar with parameter FA-05~FA-07.
Two groups of PID parameters can be switch by multi-functional digital DI terminal, can also
according to the deviation of PID automatic switching.
Selection for the multi-function DI terminal switch, the multi-function terminal selection is set to 34
(PID parameter switch terminal), when the terminal is invalid selecting parameters group 1 (FA-05 -
FA-07), when terminal is valid selecting parameters group 2 (FA-15-FA-17).
Selection for automatical switching, when the absolute value of the deviation between the given and
feedback is less than PID parameter switch deviation 1 FA-19, PID parameters selection parameter
group 1. When the absolute value of deviation between given and feedback is greater than PID
parameter switch deviation 2 FA-20, PID parameters selection parameter group 2. When the
deviation between the given and feedback is between switch deviation 1 and 2, the PID parameter is
a linear interpolation of twp set of PID parameter, as shown in the figure below.
PID parameter
PID parameter 1
FA-05, FA-06,
FA-07
PID parameter 2
FA-15, FA-16,
FA-17 PID
FA-19 FA-20 Deviation
Fig 6-18 Schematic diagram for PID parameters automatically switchover
FA-21 PID Initial Value 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
PID Initial Value Hold

FA-22 0.00s~650.00s 0.00s ○
Time
When the frequency converter starts up, the PID output is fixed to the PID initial FA-21, continuous
PID initial value after holding time FA-22, PID to start the closed-loop adjustment operation.
Output frequency
FA-21
Time
PID initial value hold time FA-22

Fig 6-19 Schematic diagram of PID initial value
This function is used to limit the difference between the PID output two beats (2ms/beat), in order to
suppress the PID output changes too fast, make the inverter running stable.
Twice Output Deviation
FA-23 0.00%~100.00% 1.00% ○
Positive Maximum Value
Twice Output Deviation

FA-24 0.00%~100.00% 1.00% ○
Reverse Maximum Value
FA-23 and FA-24 respectively corresponding the maximum value of the absolute value of the output
- 150 -
deviation in forward and reverse.

Unit’s digit: integral separation
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
FA-25 PID Integral Property Ten’s digit: whether stop integral after 0x00 ○
output the limit
0: Continue integral
1: Stop integral
Integral separation
If set up integral separation is effective, then when the multifunction digital DI integral pause (function
32) is valid and PID integral stop operation, the PID only proportional and differential function
effectively.
When the integral separation selection for invalid, no matter whether the multi-function digital DI is
valid, integral separation is invalid.
Whether to stop the integral after output to the limit
After the PID operation output reached the maximum or minimum value, can selection whether to
stop the integral action. If selection for stop integral, then the PID integral stop calculation, which may
help to reduce the overshoot amount of PID.
PID Feedback Lost 0.0%: Don’t judge feedback lost

FA-26 0.0% ○
Detection Value 0.1%~100.0%
PID Feedback Lost

FA-27 0.0s~20.0s 0.0s ○
Detection Time
This function code is used to determine whether PID feedback is lost.

When the PID feedback quantity is less than the feedback loss detection values FA-26, and duration
more than PID feedback loss detection time FA-27, frequency converter alarm fault Err. 23, and deal
with according to the selected fault processing method.
PID Feedback Lost

FA-28 Detection Starting 0.00Hz~max frequency 10.00Hz ○
Frequency
0: No operation when stop

FA-29 PID Stop Operation 0 ○
1: Operation when stop
Used to select the PID in stop condition, PID whether to continue operations. General application in
the case of PID should stop operation under the stop condition.
The Lower Limit Value of 0.0%: No limit

FA-30 Feedback when PID 0.0.% ○
Action 0.1%~100.0%
When the PID feedback value is less than the lower limit, the PID regulation does not act, which is
mainly used to reduce PID regulation and maintain the stability of the system.
- 151 -
Fb Enhance Function Group

Fb-00 Jog Running Frequency 0.00Hz~max frequency 5.00Hz ○
Model
Fb-01 Jog Acceleration Time 0.0s~6500.0s ○
dependent
Model
Fb-02 Jog Deceleration Time 0.0s~6500.0s ○
dependent
Definition the given frequency and acceleration/deceleration time of frequency converter in jog.
When jog running, the start mode is fixed to the direct start mode (F1-00=0) and the stop mode is
fixed to the deceleration stop (F1-08=0).
Model
Fb-03 Acceleration Time 2 0.0s~6500.0s ○
dependent
Model
Fb-04 Deceleration Time 2 0.0s~6500.0s ○
dependent
Model
dependent
Model
dependent
Model
dependent
Model
dependent
VD520 provide four groups of acceleration/deceleration time, respectively F0-18/F0-19 and the above
three groups of acceleration/deceleration time.
The definition of four groups of acceleration/deceleration time are exactly the same, please reference
F0-18 and F0-19 related instructions.
Through the different combination of the multi-function digital inputs terminal DI, it can be switched to
select 4 groups of acceleration/deceleration time.
Schedule 1 is the terminal functional specifications of acceleration/deceleration time selection.
Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Acceleration/deceleration time selection Corresponding Parameter
OFF OFF Acceleration time 1 F0-18, F0-19
OFF ON Acceleration time 2 Fb-03, Fb-04
ON OFF Acceleration time 3 Fb-05, Fb-06
ON ON Acceleration time 4 Fb-07, Fb-08
Fb-09 Emergency Stop Time 0.0s~6500.0s 10.0s ○
When the DI function 30 is effective, the set time of Fb-09 will be delecerate to stop.
Acceleration Time 1 and

Fb-10 time 2 Switching 0.00Hz~max frequency 0.00Hz ○
Frequency Point
- 152 -
Deceleration Time 1 and

Fb-11 time 2 Switching 0.00Hz~max frequency 0.00Hz ○
Frequency Point
The function in the motor selection for 1 and not through the DI terminal switch to select the
acceleration/deceleration time effectively. Used in the process of inverter running, not through the DI
terminal but according to the running frequency range, selection different acceleration/deceleration
time.
Set frequency
Fb-10
Fb-11
Time(t)
Deceleration
Acceleration time 2
time 2
Acceleration Acceleration
time 1 time 2
Fig 6-20 Schematic diagram of acceleration/deceleration time switching
Fb-12 Hopping Frequency 1 0.00Hz~max frequency 0.00Hz ○
Fb-13 Hopping Frequency 2 0.00Hz~max frequency 0.00Hz ○
Hopping Frequency
Range
When the setting frequency is within the range of hopping frequency, the actual running frequency will
run in closer from the hopping frequency of the setting frequency. By setting the hopping frequency,
can make the frequency converter to avoid the mechanical resonance point of load.
VD520 can be set up to two hopping frequency points, if the two hopping frequency are set to 0, then
cancel the hopping frequency function. The principle of the hopping frequency and the hopping
frequency range is as below.
Actual output
frequency
Hopping frequency range

Hopping frequency range
Set frequency
Hopping frequency
Fig 6-21 Schematic diagram of hopping frequency
Hopping Frequency
Whether Valid in the 0: Disabled
Fb-15 0 ○
Process of Acceleration 1: Enabled
and Deceleration
The function code is used to set the hopping frequency during the process of acceleration and
- 153 -
deceleration is valid.
When the setting is effective and the running frequency is in the range of hopping frequency, the
actual running frequency will skip hopping frequency set boundary.
The following diagram is a schematic diagram of the hopping frequency effectively in the process of
acceleration and deceleration.
Output
frequency(Hz)
Hopping Hopping frequency range

frequency 2 Hopping frequency range
Hopping Hopping frequency range

frequency 2 Hopping frequency range
Time(t)
Fig 6-22 Effective schematic diagram of hopping frequency in the process of acceleration and deceleration
Frequency Detection
Value (FDT1)
Frequency Detection
Fb-17 0.0%~100.0% (FDT1 electrical level ) 5.0% ○
Lagged Value (FDTI)
Frequency Detection
Value (FDT2)
Frequency Detection
Fb-19 0.0%~100.0% (FDT2 electrical level ) 5.0% ○
Lagged Value (FDT2)
When the running frequency is higher than the frequency detecion values, the frequency converter
multi-function output DO output ON signal, and the frequency is lower than a certain frequency values
of the detection values, the DO output ON signal is cancelled.
The above parameters are used to set the detection value of output frequency, and cancel the lag
value of the output motion. Among them, the Fb-17 (Fb-19) is the percentage of lagging frequency
relative to the frequency detection values Fb- 6 (Fb-18). The diagram below for the FDT function.
- 154 -
Output
frequency(Hz)
FDT Lagged
FDT Electrical
level
value=Fb-
16*Fb-17 or
Fb-18*Fb-19
Frequency Time(t)
reaching
detection signal
（DO relay）
ON
Time(t)
Fig 6-23 Schematic diagram of FDT electrical level
Frequency Reached
Fb-20 0.0%~100.0% (max frequency) 0.0% ○
Detection Amplitude
The running frequency of the inverter, in a certain range of target frequency, inverter multi-function
DO output ON signal.
This parameter is used to set the detection range of frequency reached, which is relative to the
percentage of the maximum frequency. The diagram below is the frequency reached.
Output
frequency(Hz)
Set
frequency Detection
range
Frequency Time(t)
reaching
detection signal
ON ON
Fig 6-24 Schematic diagram of frequency reached detect amplitude
- 155 -
Any Frequency Reaching

Detection Value 1

Fb-22 0.0%~100.0% (max frequency) 0.0% ○
Detection Amplitude 1

Detection Value 2
Fb-24 0.0%~100.0% (max frequency) 0.0% ○
Detection Amplitude 2
When the output frequency of frequency converter, in the range of positive and nagetive detection
amplitude of the detection value at any time, muti-function DO output ON signal.
VD520 provides two sets of any frequency reaching detection parameters, set the frequency value
and frequency detection range respectively. The diagram below is a diagram of the function.
Running
frequency
Frequency
Any frequency detection range
reaching Frequency
detection range
Time(t)
Any frequency ON ON
reaching
detection DO or OFF OFF OFF
relay
Fig 6-25 Schematic diagram of any frequency reaching detection
0.0%~300.0%
Zero Current Detection
Fb-25 100.0% corresponding rated motor 5.0% ○
Levels
current
Zero Current Detection

Fb-26 0.01s~600.00s 0.10s ○
Delay Time
When the output current of the inverter is less than or equal to zero current detection level, and the
duration is more than the zero current detection delay time, the inverter muti-function DO output ON
signal. Below is the zero current detection schematic diagram.
- 156 -
Output
current
Zero current
detection level
Time
Fb-25
Zero current
detection signal
ON
Time
Zero current detection time Fb-26
Fig 6-26 Schematic diagram of zero current detection
Output Current Limit 0.0% (no detection)

Fb-27 200.0% ○
Exceed 0.1%~300.0% (rated motor current)
Output Current Limit

Fb-28 Exceed Detection Delay 0.00s~600.00s 0.00s ○
Time
When the output current of the inverter is greater than or limit exceed detection point, and the
duration is more than the software overcurrent point detection delay time, inverter multi-function DO
output ON signal, the following figure is the output current limit exceed function diagram.
Output
current
Fb-27
Time(t)
DO Time(t)
output
Fb-28 DO output
Fig 6-27 Schematic diagram of output current limit exceed detection
- 157 -
Fb-29 Any Current Reaching 1 0.0%~300.0% (rated motor current) 100.0% ○
Any Current Reaching 1

Amplitude
Fb-31 Any Current Reaching 2 0.0%~300.0% (rated motor current) 100.0% ○
Any Current Reaching 2

Amplitude
When the output current of frequency converter is set at the positive and nagetive detection amplitude
of any current reaching, inverter muti-function the DO output ON signal.
VD520 provide two sets of any current reach and the detection amplitude parameter, the following
figure is the function diagram.
Output current
Frequency detection range

Any current reaching
Frequency detection range
Time
ON ON ON
Any frequency reaching
detection signal DO or
relay OFF OFF OFF OFF
Fig 6-28 Schematic diagram of any current reaching detection
The Running Reached

Fb-33 0.0Min~6500.0Min 0.0Min ○
Time Setting
When the start of the run time reached this time, the frequency converter multi-function digital DO
function output ON signal "current running time reached".
Accumulative Power-on
Fb-34 0h~65535h 0h ○
Reached Time Setting
Used to set the inverter power on time.

When the accumulative power on time (FF-15) reached the setting accumulative power on time,
frequency converter multi-function digital DO output ON signal.
Accumulative Running
Fb-35 0h~65535h 0h ○
Reached Time Setting
Used to set the inverter running time.

When the accumulative running time (FF-14) reached the setting accumulative running time, inverter
multi-function digital DO output ON signal.
- 158 -
Timing Function 0: Disabled

Fb-36 0 ○
0: Fb-38 setting
1: AI1
Timed Running Time 2: AI2
Fb-37 0 ○
Selection 3: Reserved
Analog input range corresponding to the
Fb-38
Fb-38 Timed Running Function 0.0Min~65000.0Min 0.0Min ○
This group of parameters used to complete the timing run function of the inverter.
When Fb-36 timing function selection is effective, the inverter timing starts when it is started, to set
timing run time, the inverter automatically stop, muti-function DO output ON signal at the same time.
Frequency converter starting at each time, timing starts from 0, timing remaining run time can be
viewed by U0-35.
Timing run time set by Fb-37, Fb-38, unit of time for minutes.
Module Temperature
Fb-39 0°C~100°C 75°C ○
Reached
Inverter radiator temperature reached the temperature, the inverter multi-function DO output "module
temperature reached" ON signal.
Lower Limit of AI1 Input

Fb-40 0.00V~Fb-41 3.10V ○
Voltage Protection Value
Upper Limit of AI1 Input

Fb-41 Fb-40~10.00V 6.80V ○
Voltage Protection Value
When the analog input AI1 value is less than Fb - 40, or the AI1 input is greater than Fb-41, the
inverter muti-function the DO output "AI1 input limit exceed" ON signal, for indicating whether the
input voltage of AI1 in the setting range.
Dormancy frequency (Fb-44)~max

Fb-42 Wakeup Frequency 0.00Hz ○
frequency (F0-10)
Fb-43 Wakeup Delay Time 0.0s~6500.0s 0.0s ○
Fb-44 Dormancy Frequency 0.00Hz~wakeup frequency (Fb-42) 0.00Hz ○
Fb-45 Dormancy Delay Time 0.0s~6500.0s 0.0s ○
This set of parameters are used to realize the dormancy and wakeup function in water supply
applications.
In the running process of frequency converter, when setting frequency less than or equal to Fb-44
dormancy frequency, after Fb-45 delay time, frequency converter to enter a dormant state, and
automatically stop.
If the frequency converter in a dormant state, and the current running command is valid, then when
setting frequency greater than or equal to Fb-42 wakeup frequency, and the frequency converter
starts up after Fb-43 delay time.
In general, please set the wakeup frequency greater than or equal to dormancy frequency. Set the
wakeup frequency and dormancy frequency is 0.00Hz, then dormancy and wakeup function is invalid.
In dormancy function is enabled, if frequency source use PID, the dormant state PID whether the
arithmetic, influenced by function code FA-29, must be selected PID stop operation (FA-29=1) at this
time.
- 159 -
Timing Braking
Fb-48 0.00Hz~50.00Hz 1.50Hz ○
Frequency
Fb-49 Timing Braking Time 0.0s~60.0s 2.0s ○
In the process of stop, when the output frequency is less than the value of Fb-48, DO function 41
(timing brake) closed after output the set time of Fb-49. As shown in the figure below.
Output
current
Timing braking
frequency
Time(t)
DO timing
braking
Time(t)
output Fb-48
Timing braking time Fb-49

Fig 6-29 Schematic diagram of timing braking action
0: Disabled
Fb-50 Terminal Jog Priority 1 ○
1: Enabled
This parameter is used to set whether the highest priority of terminal jog function.
When the terminal jog priority is valid, if terminal jog command appeared in the process of running,
the inverter switch to a terminal jog running state.
Swing Frequency Setting 0: Relative to center frequency

Fb-51 0 ○
Method 1: Relative to max frequency
Through this parameter to determine the benchmark of the swing.

0: Relative center frequency (F0-05 frequency source), for variable amplitude system. The amplitude
of the swing is varied with the change of the central frequency (setting frequency).
1: Relative maximum frequency (F0-10), as the swing system, swing fixed.
Swing Frequency
Fb-52 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
Amplitude
Jumping Frequency
Fb-53 0.0%~50.0% 0.0% ○
Amplitude
Through this parameter to determine the value of the amplitude and jumping frequency.
When setting swing relative to the center frequency (Fb-51=0), swing AW = frequency source F0-5 x
swing amplitude Fb - 52. When setting swing relative to the maximum frequency (Fb-51=1), swing
AW = maximum frequency F0-10 x swing amplitude Fb - 52.
Jumping frequency range for the swing frequency runtime, jumping frequency relative to the
frequency percentage of the swing, i.e., jumping frequency=swing AW * jumping frequency amplitude
- 160 -
Fb-53. If selection swing relative to the center frequency (Fb-51=0), jumping frequency is the variable
value. If selection swing relative to the maximum frequency (Fb-51=1), jumping frequency is a fixed
value.
Swing running frequency is constraints by the frequency upper limit and frequency lower limit.
Output frequency(Hz) Swing frequency ampli tude

Aw=Fs et*Pb-52
Swing frequency
+Aw
upper li mit
Center frequency Fset
Swing frequency -Aw

lower li mit
Jumpi ng
frequency=Aw*Pb-53
Swing frequency
Accel erat e according cycle Triangl e wave Decel erat e according to
to accelerat ion time rise time deceleration ti me
Runni ng frequency
Fig 6-30 Schematic diagram of swing frequency function
Fb-54 Swing Frequency Cycle 0.1s~3000.0s 10.0s ○
Triangular Wave of Swing

Fb-55 0.1%~100.0% 50.0% ○
Frequency Rise Time
Swing frequency cycle: a complete time value of swing frequency cycle.

Triangle wave rise time coefficient Fb-55, is a triangular wave rise time relative the time percentage of
the swing frequency cycle Fb-54.
Triangle wave rise time=swing frequency cycle Fb-54 x triangle wave rise time coefficient Fb-55, and
the unit is the second.
Triangle wave fall time=swing frequency cycle Fb-54 x (1-triangle wave rise time coefficient Fb-55),
unit for seconds.
Fb-56 Set Length 0m~65535m 1000m ○
Fb-57 Actual Length 0m~65535m 0m ○
Number of Pulse per

Fb-58 0.1~6553.5 100.0 ○
Meter
The above function code is used to fixed-length control.

Length information need to be cpllect by the multi-function digital input terminals, terminal sampling
pulse number and the number of pulses per meter Fb-58 division, can calculate the actual length
Fb-57. When the actual length is greater than the set length Fb-56, multi-function digital DO output
"length reached" ON signal.
In the process of the fixed length control, through the multi-function DI terminals, for the length of the
reset operation (DI function selection for 47), specific please refer to the F5-00~F5-06.
In the application, need to set the corresponding input terminals function to "length counting input"
(function 46), when the pulse frequency is higher, must use HDI1 port.
- 161 -
Fb-59 Set Count Value 1~65535 1000 ○
Fb-60 Designated Count Value 1~65535 1000 ○
Count value need to be collect by the multi-function digital input terminals. In the application, need to
set the corresponding input terminals function to "counter input" (function 44), when the pulse
frequency is higher, must use DI5 port.
When the count vale reached set count value Fb-59, multi-function digital DO output "set count value
reached" ON signal, then the counter stop counting.
When the count value reached the designated count value Fb-60, multi-function digital DO output
"designated count value reached" ON signal, and the counter continue to count, the counter stop until
the " set count value".
Designated count value Fb-60 shall not be greater than set count value Fb-59. Below is the function
diagram for set count value reached and designated count value reached.
Count pulse 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DI5
Set count
DO1
Designated count
relay
Fig 6-31 Schematic diagram of set count valueand designated value
- 162 -
FC Multi-reference and Simple PLC Parameters Group

Multi-reference can be used in three occasions: as the frequency source, the voltage source of V/F
separation and the set source of process PID.
Under three kinds of applications, the dimension of the multi reference is relative value, the range of
-100.0%~100.0%, when as the frequency source it is relative to the percentage of the maximum
frequency; when as the V/F separation voltage source, is relative to the percentage of the rated motor
voltage; and because PID is given as a relative value, the multi-reference as set source of PID don't
need a dimensional transformation.
- 163 -
Fig 6-32 Multistage speed operation schematic diagram

Schedule 2 is function instruction of multi-reference.
Four multi-reference terminals, can be combined into 16 kinds of state, these 16 states corresponding
to16 instruction set value. As shown in table.
K4 K3 K2 K1 Reference Setting Corresponding Parameter
OFF OFF OFF OFF Multi-reference 0 FC-00
OFF OFF OFF ON Multi-reference 1 FC-01
OFF OFF ON OFF Multi-reference 2 FC-02
OFF OFF ON ON Multi-reference 3 FC-03
OFF ON OFF OFF Multi-reference 4 FC-04
OFF ON OFF ON Multi-reference 5 FC-05
OFF ON ON OFF Multi-reference 6 FC-06
OFF ON ON ON Multi-reference 7 FC-07
ON OFF OFF OFF Multi-reference 8 FC-08
ON OFF OFF ON Multi-reference 9 FC-09
ON OFF ON OFF Multi-reference 10 FC-10
ON OFF ON ON Multi-reference 11 FC-11
ON ON OFF OFF Multi-reference 12 FC-12
ON ON OFF ON Multi-reference 13 FC-13
ON ON ON OFF Multi-reference 14 FC-14
ON ON ON ON Multi-reference 15 FC-15
When the frequency source is selected for MS speed, 100.0% of function code FC-00~ FC-15,
corresponding to the maximum frequency F0-10.
- 164 -
Multi-reference in addition to as a multistage speed function, also can be a given source of PID, or as
a voltage source of V/F separation control etc., to meet the demand of the need of switching between
different given values.
0: Stop when single run end

1: Keep the final value when single run
FC-16 Simple PLC Run Mode 0 ○
end
2: Always circulation
Simple PLC has two functions: as frequency source or as a voltage source of V/F separation.
The following figure is a simple PLC as the frequency source. When simple PLC as frequency source,
the positive and negative of FC-00~FC-15 to determine the running direction, if the negative value
indicates that the frequency inverter is running in the opposite direction.
Running
direction
FC-19 FC-23
FC-21 FC-14
FC-02
FC-15
FC-00
Time(t)
FC-01
FC-18 FC-20
DO or relay
output
250ms pulse
output
Fig 6-33 Schematic diagram of simple PLC
As a frequency source, PLC has three operation modes, as a V/F separation voltage source does not
have this three ways. Among them:
0: Signal run end stop
After completing a single cycle inverter automatically stop, need operation command given to start
again.
1: Single run end terminal
After completing a single cycle, inverter automatically keep the running frequency and direction of the
last stage.
2: Always circulating
After completion of a cycle, the frequency inverter automatically starts the next cycle, until the stop
command is stopped.
- 165 -
Unit’s digit: power failure retentive

selection
0: Non-retentive at power failure
Simple PLC Power
FC-17 Failure Retentive 1: Retentive at power failure 0x00 ○
Selection Ten’s digit: stop retentive selection
0: Non-retentive at stop
1: Retentive at stop
PLC power failure retentive refers to the running stage and running frequency of PLC before the
power failure retentive, the next time power on from memory stage to continue running. Selection non
retentive, then each time power on to restart PLC process.
PLC stop retentive is records the running stage and running frequency of the previous PLC when
power off, the next time running from memory stage to continue running. Selection non retentive, then
each time start to restart PLC process.
Run Time of Simple PLC

FC-18 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 0
Acceleration /
Deceleration Time
FC-19 0~3 0 ○
Selection of Simple PLC
Reference 0

FC-20 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 1
Acceleration /
Deceleration Time
FC-21 0~3 0 ○
Reference 1

FC-22 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 2
Acceleration /
Deceleration Time
FC-23 0~3 0 ○
Reference 2

FC-24 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 3
Acceleration /
Deceleration Time
FC-25 0~3 0 ○
Reference 3
FC-26 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 4
Acceleration /
Deceleration Time
FC-27 0~3 0 ○
Reference 4

FC-28 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 5
- 166 -
Acceleration /
Deceleration Time
FC-29 0~3 0 ○
Reference 5

FC-30 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 6
Acceleration /
Deceleration Time
FC-31 0~3 0 ○
Reference 6

FC-32 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 7
Acceleration /
Deceleration Time
FC-33 0~3 0 ○
Reference 7

FC-34 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 8
Acceleration /
Deceleration Time
FC-35 0~3 0 ○
Reference 8
FC-36 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 9
Acceleration /
Deceleration Time
FC-37 0~3 0 ○
Reference 9

FC-38 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 10
Acceleration /
Deceleration Time
FC-39 0~3 0 ○
Reference 10

FC-40 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 11
Acceleration /
Deceleration Time
FC-41 0~3 0 ○
Reference 11

FC-42 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 12
Acceleration /
Deceleration Time
FC-43 0~3 0 ○
Reference 12
- 167 -

FC-44 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 13
Acceleration /
Deceleration Time
FC-45 0~3 0 ○
Reference 13
FC-46 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 14
Acceleration /
Deceleration Time
FC-47 0~3 0 ○
Reference 14
FC-48 0.0s (h)~6553.5s (h) 0.0s (h) ○
Reference 15
Acceleration /
Deceleration Time
FC-49 0~3 0 ○
Reference 15
Simple PLC Run Time 0: s

FC-50 0 ○
Unit 1: h
0: Coding FC-00 given

1: AI1
2: AI2
3: Reserved
Multi-reference 0 Setting
FC-51 4: PULSE 0 ○
Method
5: PID
6: Preset frequency(F0-09)given,
UP/DOWN can modify
This parameter decision the given channel of multi-reference 0.
In addition to FC-00, there are a variety of other options to convenient switching between
multi-reference and other given way. When the multi-reference is used as a frequency source or
simple PLC as a frequency source, can be easy to implement the switching between two kinds of
frequency source.
MS Speed 0: Function code confirm
FC-52 Acceleration/Deceleratio 0 ○
n Time Selection Mode 1: Terminal confirm
Selection MS speed acceleration and deceleration time. Can be determined by the simple PLC
corresponding to each of the acceleration and deceleration time, can also can 4 stage acceleration
and deceleration time selected by the DI terminal (you can refer to the acceleration and deceleration
time selection terminal functional specification in schedule 2 of F5 group).
Fd MODBUS Communication Parameter Group
Please refer to chapter 9 communication protocol.
- 168 -
FF User Parameters Group

FF-00 User Password 0:~65535 0 ○
FF-00 set any non-zero number, and then the password protection function will be enabled.
When enter the menu next time, must input password correctly, otherwise can’t view and modify the
function parameters, please keep in mind that the user password is set.
Set FF-00 to 0000: then clear the user password set, and disable the password protection function.
0: No operation
1: Restore factory default setup value,
exclude of motor parameter
FF-01 Parameter Initialization 0 ◎
2: Clear the record information
3: Backup user current parameters
4: Restore user current parameters
1. Restore the factory settings, not including motor parameters

After set the FF-01 to 1, most of frequency inverter function parameters restored to the factory
parameters, but the motor parameters, the frequency instruction decimal point (F0-15), the fault
recording information, the cumulative power consumption (FF-13), the cumulative power on time
(FF-14), the total running time (FF-15) are not restored.
2. Clear the record information
To remove converter fault record information, cumulative power consumption (FF-13), cumulative
power on time (FF-14), total running time (FF-15).
3. Backup user current parameters
Back up the parameters currently set by the user. Backup the current setting values of all the
functional parameters. To facilitate the customer recovery after parameter adjustment disorder.
4. Restore user backup parameters
Restore the user parameters that backuped before, namely recovery by setting the FF-01 to 3 backup
parameters.
Unit’s digit:
0: Not display A group
Function Code Display 1: Display A group
FF-03 0x11 ○
Selection Ten’s digit:
0: Not display b group
1: Display b group
The establishment of Parameters display mode is convenient for user to view the function parameters
of different arrangement forms according to the actual needs.
Function Code Modify 0: Can modify

FF-04 0 ○
Property 1: Can’t modify
User Settings function code parameters whether can modify, used to prevent the risk of function
parameter being change mistake.
The function code is set to 0, then all function code can be modified; while set to 1, all function code
can only view, can't be modified.
- 169 -
Unit’s digit: user custom parameter

group display selection
0: Not display
1: Display
FF-05 Fast Debugging Setting 0x10 ○
Ten’s digit: user change parameter group
display selection
0: Not display
1: Display
When F7-00 selection for 5 (fast debugging) function, to set open or close the JOG/REV key by FF-05
can switch of three kinds of parameters display.
Name Description
Function parameter Order display function parameters and the frequency converter with F0 ~ FF,
mode A0 ~ A4, b0 ~ b3, U0 function parameter set.
Custom display function of the individual parameters (up to customize 32), the
Custom parameters user need to display the function of the parameters were identified through the
b0 group.
User change
Different with the factory parameter function parameters.
parameters mode
When the fast debugging is effective, this time can through the JOG/REV key switch into a different
parameter display mode, the default value for the function parameter mode display, the default can be
switched to the users to change the parameter mode display.
Function display mode Display
Function parameter display
Custom parameters display
User change parameters display
The display code of display mode of each parameters is:
VD520 inverter provides two groups of personality parameters display mode: the user to customize
the parameters, the user to change the parameter.
User customization parameters group is set up to the parameter of b0 group, the maximum can
selection 32 parameters, these parameters can be summarized together, and can be easy to debug.
Under customization parameter mode, default add a symbol of u before the user’s custom function
code.
For example: F0-01, in the user customization parameters, the display effect is uF0-01.
The user changes the parameters of the user to change the parameters that are different from the
factory value. The user change parameter group is good for the customer to check the parameter
summary of changes, and it is convenient for find problems at scene.
Users change the parameters, default add a symbol c before the user’s custom function code.
For example F7-00, in the user to change the parameters, display effect is cF7-00.
Factory
FF-06 Product Code 0~65535 ●
Setting
Factory
FF-07 Software Versioning 1.00~10.00 ●
Setting
Factory
FF-08 Inverter Model ●
Setting
- 170 -
Date of Production Factory

FF-09 0~9999 ●
(Year/Month) Setting
Date of Production Factory

FF-10 0~31 ●
(Date) Setting
Product information.
Inverter Module
FF-11 0°C~120°C 0 ●
Radiator Temperature
Inverter module temperature.

Accumulative Power
FF-13 0°C~65535°C 0°C ●
Consumption
Show the inverter accumulative power consumption so far.

Accumulative Runing
FF-14 0h~65535h 0h ●
Time
Display the accumulative running time of frequency converter since the factory.
When this time reach to set running time (Fb-35), inverter multi-function digital output function (30)
output ON signal.
Accumulative Power-on
FF-15 0h~65535h 0h ●
Time
Display the accumulative power time of frequency inverter since the factory.
When this time reach to set running time (Fb-34), inverter multi-function digital output function (31)
output ON signal.
FP Factory Parameter Group
Factory set parameters, users don’t need to modify, forbidden user tries to enter the parametes group
to view or modify any of the data, otherwise it will bring unexpected circumstances and even serious
fault.
- 171 -
A0 Motor 1 Torque Control Parameter Group

Speed/Torque Control 0: Speed control
A0-00 0 ◎
Mode Selection 1: Torque control
Used to select the inverter control mode: speed control or torque control.
VD520’s multi-function digital DI terminal, have two function associated with torque control: torque
control prohibit (function 40), speed control/torque control switch (function 39). The two terminals
should be use in conjunction with A0-00 to realize the switch between speed and torque control.
When the speed control/torque control switch terminal is invalid, the control mode is determined by
A0-00, if the speed control switch/torque control switch is effective, the control mode is equivalent to
the value of A0-00.
In any case, the frequency inverter is fixed to the speed control mode when the torque control prohibit
terminal is valid.

1: AI1
2: AI2
3: Reserved
Torque Setting Source 4: PULSE
A0-01 Selection under the 5: Communication setting 0 ◎
Torque Control Mode
6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
7: MAX (AI1, AI2)
8: Keypad Potentiometer (the full scale
of option 1~7 corresponding digital
setting of A0-02)
Torque Digital Setting

A0-02 under the Torque Control -200.0%~2000% 100.0% ○
Mode
A0-01 is used to select the torque setting source, a total of 8 kinds of torque setting method.
Torque setting use the relative value, and 100% corresponding the rated torque of the inverter. Set
range -200.0%~200.0%, which shows that frequency inverter maximum torque of the 2 times the
rated torque of the inverter.
When the torque is setting using 1~7, communication, analog input, and 100% of pulse input
corresponding A0-02.

1: AI1
Max Frequency Source 2: AI2
A0-03 Selection under the 3: Reserved 0 ◎
Torque Control Forward 4: PULSE
Max Frequency Digital

A0-04 Setting under the Torque 0.00Hz~max frequency 50.00Hz ○
Control Forward
- 172 -

1: AI1
Max Frequency Source 2: AI2
A0-05 Selection under the 3: Reserved 0 ◎
Torque Control Reverse 4: PULSE
Max Frequency Digital

A0-06 Setting under the Torque 0.00Hz~max frequency 50.00Hz ○
Control Reverse
Used to set the forward or reverse maximum running frequency of the inverter under the torque
control mode.
When the inverter torque control, if the load torque is less than the motor output torque, the motor
speed will continue to rise, to prevent mechanical systems appear coasters and other accidents, must
limit the motor highest speed when torque control.
Torque Control
A0-07 0.00s~650.00s 0.00s ○
Acceleration Time
Torque Control
A0-08 0.00s~650.00s 0.00s ○
deceleration Time
Under the torque control mode, the difference between the motor output torque and load torque,
determine the speed change rate of the motor and load, so the speed of the motor can be changed
quickly, which brings the problems such as high noise or mechanical stress. By setting the torque
control acceleration and deceleration time, the motor speed can change smoothly.
But for the occasion need torque rapid response, you need to set the torque control acceleration and
deceleration time is 0.00 s.
For example: two motor hard-wired drag the same load, in order to ensure the load uniform
distribution, set a frequency inverter for the host, using the speed control mode, another inverter for
the host and using torque control, the actual output torque of the host as the torque instructions of
slave, the slave torque needs to quickly follow the host at this point, so the torque control acceleration
and deceleration time of slave is 0.00s.
A0-09 Starting Torque Setting 0.0%~100.0% 10.0% ○
Excitation Current
Coefficient under the
A0-10 20.0%~150.0% 100.0% ○
Torque Control (only
effective to SVC)
Torque control parameters, according to the actual situation to set the appropriate value.
Low Frequency Torque

A0-11 0.0%~50.0% 0.0% ○
Compensation Amount
Low Frequency Torque

Frequency Upper Limit
High Frequency Torque

A0-13 0.0%~50.0% 3.0% ○
Compensation Amount
High Frequency Torque

Frequency Lower Limit
- 173 -
The related parameters of the torque compensation, torque compensation for low frequency and high
frequency, stable output.
Rotational Inertia 0: Internal frequency

A0-15 Compensation 1: Feedforward frequency variation 1 ◎
Reference 2: Feedforward frequency
0: AI1
1: AI2
Feedforward Frequency
Source Selection
3: PULSE
Rotational Inertia
A0-17 Compensation 0.00~10.00 0.00 ○
Coefficient
Rotational Inertia
A0-18 Compensation Upper 0.0%~50.0% 5.0% ○
Limit
Rotational Inertia
A0-19 Compensation Starting 0.00Hz~max frequency 10.00Hz ○
Frequency
Lowest Resolution 0.00: Not limit

A0-20 Frequency (only effective 1.00Hz ○
to SVC) 0.01Hz~2.00Hz
The related parameters of the rotational inertia, generally do not need to adjuste.
Disconnection Detection 0.0: Disconnection is invalid

A0-21 0.0 ○
Time 0.1~60.0s
Disconnection detection time is set to zero, the line detection function is effective, when the actual
output frequency reaches (upper limit frequency -0.5Hz), the duration exceeds the set break
- 174 -
AI Optimize Control Parameter Group

Model
A1-00 Carrier Frequency 0.5kHz~16.0kHz ○
dependent
This function is used to adjust the carrier frequency of the inverter. By adjusting the carrier frequency
can reduce motor noise and avoid the resonance point of mechanical system, reduce the line of floor
drain current and reducing interference caused by frequency inverter.
When the carrier frequency is low, the output current harmonic component increases, motor loss
increases, the temperature rise of the motor increases.
When the carrier frequency is high, the motor loss is decreases, the motor temperature decreases,
but the inverter loss increases, the inverter temperature rise, and the interference increases.
Adjusting the carrier frequency will affect the following performance.
Carrier frequency Low → High
Motor noise Big → Small
Output current waveform Bad → Good
Motor s temperature rising High → Low
Inverter temperature rising Low → High

Leakage current Small → Big
External radiated interference Small → Big
Different power inverter, the factory settings of carrier frequency are different. Although the user can
modify according to the need, but need to pay attention: if the carrier frequency is higher than the
factory value, will lead to frequency inverter radiator temperature rise, at this time the user needs to
use the frequency converter derating, otherwise the inverter has the risk of overheating alarm.
Carrier Frequency 0: No
A1-01 Adjustment with the 1 ○
Temperature 1: Yes
Carrier frequency adjustment with the temperature, is refers to the frequency inverter is detected its
radiator at high temperature, reduce the carrier frequency automatically, in order to reduce the
frequency inverter temperature rise. When the radiator at low temperature, carrier frequency is
gradually restored to the setting value. This function can reduce the chance of inverter overheat
alarm.
DPWM Switching
A1-02 0.00Hz~15.00Hz 12.00Hz ○
Frequency Upper Limit
Only valid for V/F control.

The wave mode determined by the asynchronous machine V/F running, which is lower than the value
of the 7 stage continuous modulation mode, on the contrary is the 5 stage intermittent modulation
mode.
The switching loss of the inverter is relatively large when for the 7 stages continuous modulation, but
the current ripple is small; switch loss is small under 5 stage intermittent modulation mode, the current
ripple is larger, may lead to the instability of the motor running at high frequency, generally do not
need to modify.
Please refer to the function code F4-11 about V/F running is not stable, on the loss and temperature
rising of the inverter please refer to the function code A1–00.
- 175 -
LED unit’s digit:

0: Asynchronous modulation
1: Synchronous modulation
A1-03 PWM Modulation Mode LED ten’s digit: 0x00 ◎
0: Two phase and three phase
modulation
1: Three phase modulation
Only valid for V/F control.

Synchronization modulation, refers to the carrier frequency linear changes with the output frequency
change to ensure that both ratio (carrier ratio) not chance, generally used in the output frequency is
higher, is conductive to the quality of the output voltage.
At low output frequency (below 100Hz), it is generally not required to be synchronized modulation,
because the ratio of carrier frequency and the output frequency is high, the asynchronous modulation
advantages is more obvious.
When the running frequency is higher than 85Hz, the synchronization modulation is effective, the
frequency of the following fixed for asynchronous modulation mode.
Dead Zone 0: Without compensation

A1-04 Compensation Mode 1: Compensation 1 1 ○
Selection 2: Compensation 2
Generally do not need to modify the parameters, only in the quality of the output voltage waveform
have special requirements, or the motor is abnormal oscillation, such as motor, need to try to switch to
select different compensation mode.
High-power is recommended for use with compensation mode 2.
0: Random PWM invalid

A1-05 Random PWM Depth 1~10: PWM carrier frequency random 0 ○
depth
Set up random PWM, can make the motor sound of the monotonous grating becomes more soft, and
can help for to reduce the external electromagnetic interference.
When the random PWM depth is 0, the random PWM is invalid. Adjust the random PWM different
depth will get different results.
Rapid Current Limiting 0: Disable

A1-06 1 ○
Enable 1: Enable
Use rapid current limiting function, can maximum limit reduce inverter appear overcurrent fault,
ensure the inverter uninterrupted running.
If the frequency inverter in rapid current limiting condition for a long time, frequency inverter could
overheat and other damage, this situation is not allowed, so the frequency inverter will alarm fault Err.
38 when for a long time fast current limiting, said inverter overload and need to stop.
Current Detection
A1-07 0~100 5 ○
Compensation
Used to set the current detection compensation of inverter, set too large may lead to a decrease in
control performance.
Generally do not need to modify.
- 176 -
0: Not optimize
SVC Optimize Mode
A1-08 1: Optimize 1 1 ○
Selection
2: Optimize 2
Optimize mode 1: used when have higher torque control linearity requirements.
Optimize mode 2: used when have high speed stability requirement.
Dead Zone Time

A1-09 100%~200% 150% ○
Adjustment
Aimed at 1140V voltage level setting.

Adjustment this value can improve the effective utilization of voltage, adjustment is too small easy to
cause system unstable.
Don't suggest the user to change.
A1-10 Droop Control 0.00Hz~10.00Hz 0.00Hz ○
This function is commonly used for load distribution when multi motors are by drive the same load.
Droop control refers to with the increase of load, make the inverter output frequency drops, so when
multi motors drive the same load, the motor output frequency of the load drop more, thus can reduce
the load of the motor, realize the load distribution of multi motors.
This parameter refers to the frequency inverter in the rated output load, the decline in value of the
output frequency.
0: Fan operation in runtime
A1-11 Cooling Fan Control 0 ○
1: Fan is always running
Used to select the action mode of cooling fan, selection for 0, the fan running when the inverter in
running state or if the radiator temperature is higher than 40 degrees in stop state, and doesn't work
when radiator less than 40 degrees in stop state.
When selection for 1, the fan operation after power on.
Speed Identification
A1-12 0~8 4 ◎
Filter Depth
0: Limit mode 1
Low Frequency Carrier
A1-13 1: Limit mode 2 0 ○
Limit Mode
2: Not Limit
To limit the carrier frequency when low frequency.

A2, 3, 4 Motor 2 Parameter Function Group
VD520 can switch between the two motors run, two electrical motor nameplate parameters can be set
respectively, can choose for motor parameter tuning, can respectively, V/F control and vector control,
encoder related parameters can be set respectively, can be set separately with the V/F control or
vector control performance related parameters.
Specific parameter regulation refer to the motor 1 related parameters.
- 177 -
b0 User Customize Function Code

b0-10 User Code 10 F5-03 ○
b0-11 User Code 11 F6-02 ○
b0-12 User Code 12 F6-03 ○
- 178 -
This function code is the users customize parameter group.

Users can in all VD520 function code, select the needed parameter summary to b0 group, as the user
customization parameters, convenient to view and change such as operation.
b0 group most provide 31 users customize parameter, b0 group parameter display value is F0.00,
said the user function code is empty.
Enter the users customize parameter mode, the display code defined by b0-00~b0-31, order
consistent with b0 group function code, will skip when for F0-00.
b1 Virtual IO Parameter Group
Virtual VDI1 Terminal
b1-00 0~59 0 ◎
Function Selection
b1-01 0~59 0 ◎
Function Selection

b1-02 0~59 0 ◎
Function Selection

b1-03 0~59 0 ◎
Function Selection

b1-04 0~59 0 ◎
Function Selection
Virtual VDI1~VDI5 are exactly the same when the control panel DI on the function, can be used as a
multi-function digital quantity input, the detail setting please refer to the introduce of F5-00~F5-09.

0: By virtual VDOx state to decide VDI is valid
or not
1: By code b1-06 setting VDI is valid or not
Virtual VDI Terminal
b1-05 Ten’s digit: virtual VDI2, same as above 0x00000 ◎
State Setting Mode
Hundred’s digit: virtual VDI3, same as above
Thousand’s digit: virtual VDI4, same as above
Ten thousand’s digit: virtual VDI5, same as
above

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Virtual VDI Terminal Ten’s digit: virtual VDI2, same as above
b1-06 0x00000 ◎
state setting Hundred’s digit: virtual VDI3, same as above
Thousand’s digit: virtual VDI4, same as above
Ten thousand’s digit: virtual VDI5, same as
above
Different from ordinary digital quantity input terminals, the state of the virtual VDI can set two ways,
and selection by b1-05.
When selecting VDI status is decided by the state of the corresponding virtual VDO, VDI whether is
valid state, depending on the VDO output as valid or invalid, and the VDIx only binding VDOx (x is 1~
5).
- 179 -
When selection VDI status are setting by the function code, through the binary system of function
code b1-06, determine the status of the virtual input terminals respectively.
The following illustrates the use method of virtual VDI.
Example 1: when selecting VDO state decided to VDI, to complete the following functions: “AI1 input
beyond the upper and lower limit, frequency inverter fault alarm and stop", can use the following
setting method:
Set VDI1 function to "user-defined failure 1" (b1-00 = 50);
Set VDI1 terminal valid state model for determine by VDO1 (b1-05 = xxx0);
Set VDO1 output function as "AI1 input beyond the upper and lower limit" (b1-11= 37);
When AI1 input beyond the upper and lower limit, the VDO1 output is ON state, the VDI1 input
terminal state is valid, inverter VDI1 receives the user-defined failure 1, the inverter will fault alarm Err.
35 and stop.
Example 2: when selecting function code b1-06 set VDI state, to complete the following functions:
"after inverter power on, automatically enter the running state", can use the following setting method:
Set VDI1 function to " forward running " (b1-00=1);
Set VDI1 terminal valid state mode is setting for function code (b1-05=xxx1);
Set VDI1 terminal status for valid (b1-06=xxx1);
Set the command source for "terminal control" (F0-01=1);
After inverter power on and finished initialization, detect VDI1 is effective, and the terminal
corresponding to forward running, equivalent to a frequency inverter receives a terminal forward
running command, frequency inverter immediately began to forward running.
Function Selection when

b1-07 0~59 0 ◎
AI1 Terminal as DI
Function Selection when

b1-08 0~59 0 ◎
AI2 Terminal as DI
Unit’s digit: AI1

0: High electrical level enable
Effective Mode Selection
b1-10 1: Low electrical level enable 0x000 ◎
when AI1 Terminal as DI
Ten’s digit: AI2, same as above
As the group function code is used to AI used as DI, when AI used as DI, when the AI input voltage is
greater than 7V, AI terminal state for high level, when the AI input voltage is lower than 3V, AI terminal
state for low level. Between 3V~7V for hysteresis A1-10 when used to determine the AI as DI, AI high
level state for valid state, or the low level for valid state.
As for AI as the function set of DI, same as the ordinary DI settings, please refer to the instructions of
F5 group related DI setup.
The following figure is take AI input voltage as an example, explaine the relationship between AI input
voltage and the corresponding DI state.
- 180 -
AI input voltage
DC7V
DC3V
Time
ON ON
AI terminal state OFF

Fig 6-33 AI terminal effective state judgment
0: Short circuit with physical DIX

Virtual VDO1 Output internal
b1-11 0 ○
Function Selection 1~43: see the F6 group physical DO
output selection

b1-12 0 ○
output selection

b1-13 0 ○
output selection

b1-14 0 ○
output selection
b1-16 VDO1 Closing Delay 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
- 181 -
Unit’s digit: VDO1

0: Positive logic
1: Anti-logic
Ten’s digit: VDO2, same as above
VDO Output Terminal
b1-21 Hundred’s digit: VDO3, same as 0x00000 ○
Effective State Selection
above
Thousand’s digit: VDO4, same as
above
VDO1 Disconnection
b1-22 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
VDO2 Disconnection
b1-23 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
VDO3 Disconnection
b1-24 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
VDO4 Disconnection
b1-25 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
VDO5 Disconnection
b1-26 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ○
Delay
Virtual digital output function, similar to the control panel DO output function, can be used to
cooperate with virtual digital quantity input VDIx, implement some simple logic control.
When virtual VDOx output function selection for 0, the output state of VDO1~VDO4 determined by
DI1~DI4 input status on the control panel, VDOx and Dix one to one corresponding at this point.
When virtual VDOx output function selection for not zero, the function setting and use methods of
VDOx is the same with the F6 group DO output related parameters, please refer to the related
parameters of the F6 group.
The same output valid state of the VDOx can selection positive logic or antilogic, setting through the
b1-10.
In VDIx application example, including the use of VDOx, please reference.
- 182 -
b2 AI Curve Setting Parameter Group

b2-00 AI Curve 4 Min Input -10.00V~b2-02 0.00V ○
b2-01 -100.0%~+100.0% 0.0% ○
AI Curve 4 Inflection
b2-02 b2-00~b2-04 3.00V ○
Point 1 Input
b2-03 AI Curve 4 Inflection -100.0%~+100.0% 30.0% ○
Point 1 Input
b2-04 b2-00~b2-06 6.00V ○
Point 2 Input
Point 2 Input
b2-06 AI Curve 4 Max Input b2-06~+10.00V 10.00V ○
b2-07 -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○
b2-08 AI Curve 5 Min Input -10.00V~b2-10 -10.00V ○
b2-09 -100.0%~+100.0% -100.0% ○
b2-10 b2-08~b2-12 -3.00V ○
Point 1 Input
b2-11 AI Curve 5 Inflection -100.0%~+100.0% -30.0% ○
Point 1 Input
b2-12 b2-10~b2-14 3.00V ○
Point 2 Input
Point 2 Input
b2-14 AI Curve 5 Max Input b2-12~+10.00V 10.00V ○
b2-15 -100.0%~+100.0% 100.0% ○
The function of curve 4 and 5 are similar with curve 1~3, but the curve 1~3 is a straight line, while the
curve 4 and 5 is 4 point curve, can realize more flexible corresponding relation. The diagram below is
curve 4~5.
- 183 -
Analog input
corresponding
setting
100%
AI Max input
setting
AI curve
inflection point 1
corresponding
setting
AI curve AI input
inflection point 2
voltage
0V（0mA） AI curve 10V
AI curve inflection point 1 （20mA）
inflection point 2
corresponding
setting
AI min input
-100%
corresponding
setting
Fig 6-34 Schematic diagram of curve 4 and curve 5

Must be noticed when setting curve 4 and 5, the minimum input voltage, inflection point 1 voltage,
inflection point 2 voltage and maximum voltage of curve must be increased in turn.
AI curve selection F5-20, used to determine the analog input AI1, AI2 how to select between 5 curves.
b2-16 AI1 Setting Jump Point -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
AI1 Setting Jump

b2-17 0.0%~100.0% 0.5% ○
Range
AI2 Setting Jump

b2-19 0.0%~100.0% 0.5% ○
Range
AI3 Setting Jump

b2-21 0.0%~100.0% 0.5% ○
Range
All the analog input AI1 and AI2 of VD520 have set value jump function.
Jump function refers to, when analog set corresponding changes within the range of jump point up
and down, to fix analog corresponding value for the jumping point value.
Such as:
The voltage of analog input AI1 fluctuates up and down in 5.00V, the range is 4.90V to 5.10V, the
minimum input 0.00V of AI1 is 0.0%, the maximum input 10.00V is 100%, then the detected AI1 set
corresponding fluctuation between 49.0%~51.0%.
Set AI1 setting jump point b2-16 is 50.0%, set the AI1 setting jump range b2-17 is 1.0%, when the
above AI1 input, after the jump function processing, get the AI1 input corresponding set to 50.0%, AI1
is transformed into a steady input, eliminates the fluctuations.
- 184 -
b3 AIAO Correction Parameter Group

Factory
b3-00 AI1 Measured Voltage 1 0.500V～4.000V ○
Correction
Factory
b3-01 AI1 Displayed Voltage 1 0.500V～4.000V ○
Correction
Factory
Correction
Factory
Correction
Factory
Correction
Factory
Correction
Factory
Correction
Factory
Correction
The group function code is used to correct the analog input AI to eliminate the influence of zero bias
and gain of AI input port.
The group function parameters has been corrected before factory, when restore the factory, will revert
to the values after factory correction. Generally don't need to be corrected at the scene of the
application.
The measured voltage refers to the actual voltage measure by the multimeter and other
measurement instruments, display voltage refers to the voltage display value of frequency inverter
sampling, as shown in U0 group AI voltage before correction (U0-21, U0-22).
When correction, input two voltage value in each input port of AI, and put the value measure by
multimeter and the value reads by U0 group respectively accurate into the above function code, the
inverter will automatically carry out the zero bias and gain correction of AI.
Factory
b3-12 AO1 Target Voltage 1 0.500V～4.000V ○
Correction
Factory
b3-13 AO1 Measured Voltage 1 0.500V～4.000V ○
Correction
Factory
Correction
Factory
Correction
Factory
b3-16 Target Voltage 1 Of AO2 0.500V～4.000V ○
Correction
Factory
Correction
Factory
Correction
Factory
Correction
- 185 -
The group function code, used to correct the analog output AO.
The group function parameters has been corrected before factory, when restore the factory, will revert
to the values after factory correction. Generally don't need to be corrected at the scene of the
application.
Target voltage is refers to the theory output voltage value of inverter. The measured voltage refers to
the actual voltage measure by the multimeter and other measurement instruments.
- 186 -
U0 Basic Monitoring Parameters Group

Code Parameter Name Display Value Display Unit Property
U0-00 Running Frequency (Hz) 0.01Hz ●
U0-01 Setting Frequency (Hz) 0.01Hz ●
U0-02 Bus Voltage (V) 0.1V ●
U0-03 Output Voltage (V) 1V ●
U0-04 Output Current (A) 0.01A ●
U0-05 Output Power (kW) 0.1kW ●
U0-06 Output Torque (%) 0.1% ●
U0-07 DI Input State 1 ●
U0-08 DO Output State 1 ●
U0-11 Reserved ●
U0-12 Count Value 1 ●
U0-13 Length Value 1 ●
U0-14 Load Speed Display 1 ●
U0-15 PID Setting 1 ●
U0-16 PID Feedback 1 ●
U0-17 PLC Stage 1 ●
Input PULSE Frequency

U0-18 0.01 kHz ●
(kHz)
U0-19 Feedback Speed (0.1Hz) 0.1Hz ●
U0-20 Setting Torque 0.1% ●
AI1 Voltage before

U0-21 0.001V ●
Correction
AI2 Voltage before

U0-22 0.001V ●
Correction
U0-23 Reserved ●
U0-24 Line Speed 1m/Min ●
U0-25 Current Power on Time 1Min ●
U0-26 Current Running Time 0.1Min ●
U0-27 Input PULSE Frequency 1Hz ●
- 187 -
Communication Setting
U0-28 0.01% ●
Value
U0-29 Reserved ●
Main Frequency A
U0-30 0.01Hz ●
display
Auxiliary Frequency B
U0-31 0.01Hz ●
Display
View Any Memory

U0-32 1 ●
Address Value
U0-35 Surplus Running Time 0.1Min ●
U0-36 Reserved ●
U0-37 Power Factor Angle 0.1° ●
U0-38 Reserved ●
VF Separation Target
U0-39 1V ●
Voltage
VF Separation Output
U0-40 1V ●
Voltage
Visual Display DI Input

U0-41 1 ●
State
Visual Display DO Input

U0-42 1 ●
State
DI Function Status Visual

(Function 01~40)
DI Function Status Visual

(Function 41~80)
U0-45 Current Fault Status 1 ●
Torque Compensation
U0-46 0.1% ●
Amount
- 188 -
VD520 Series Inverter User Manual EMC Guide
Chapter 7 EMC Guide

7.1 Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of the electric equipment to run in the electromagnetic
interference environment and implement its function stably without interferences on the
electromagnetic environment.
7.2 EMC Standard Introduction
VD520 inverters have pass CE Test and is conformed to the requirements of the standard
IEC/EN61800-3: 2004.
IEC/EN61800-3 assesses the inverter in terms of electromagnetic interference and Anti
electromagnetic interference. Electromagnetic interference mainly tests the radiation interference,
conduction interference and harmonics interference on the inverter (required for the inverter for civil
use)Anti-electromagnetic interference mainly tests the conduction immunity, radiation immunity, surge
interference immunity, rapid mutation pulse group immunity, ESD immunity and low frequency of
power supply immunity.
7.3 EMC Guide
During inverter installation and usage, please comply to details of this chapter, in general industry
environment it has good electromagnetic compatibility.
7.3.1 Harmonic Effect:
Higher harmonics of power supply may damage the inverter. Thus, at some places where power
quality is rather poor, it is recommended to install AC input reactor.
7.3.2 Electromagnetic Interference and Installation Precautions
There are two kinds of electromagnetic interferences, one is interference of electromagnetic noise in
the surrounding environment on the inverter, and the other is interference of inverter on the
surrounding equipment.
Installation precautions:
1) The earth wires of the inverter and other electric products shall be well grounded;
2) The power input and output power cables of the inverter and weak current signal cables (e.g.
control line) shall not be arranged in parallel and vertical arrangement is preferable.
3) It is recommended that the output power cables of the inverter employ shield cables or steel pipe
shielded cables and that the shielding layer be earthed reliably. The lead cables of the equipment
suffering interferences are recommended to employ twisted-pair shielded control cables, and the
shielding layer shall be earthed reliably.
4) When the length of motor cable is longer than 100 meters, it needs to install output filter or reactor.
7.3.3 Handling Method for the Interferences of the Surrounding Equipment on the Inverter
The electromagnetic interference on the inverter is generated because plenty of relays, contactors
and electromagnetic braking are installed near the inverter. When the inverter has error action due to
the interferences, the following measures can be taken:
1) Install surge suppressor on the devices generating interference;
2) Install filter at the input end of the inverter. Refer to Section 7.3.6 for the specific operations.
3) The lead cables of the control signal cable of the inverter and the detection line employ shielded
cable and the shielding layer shall be earthed reliably.
7.3.4 Handling Method for the Interferences of Inverter on the Surrounding Equipment
These interferences include two types: one is radiation interference of the inverter, and the other is
conduction interference of the inverter. These two types of interferences cause the surrounding
electric equipment to suffer electromagnetic or electrostatic induction. The surrounding equipment
hereby produces error action. For different interferences, it can be handled by referring to the
following methods:
1) For the measuring meters, receivers and sensors, their signals are generally weak. If they are
- 189 -
EMC Guide VD520 Series Inverter User Manual
placed nearby the inverter or together with the inverter in the same control cabinet, they are easy to
suffer interference and thus generate error actions. It is recommended to handle with the following
methods: Put in places far away from the interference source; do not arrange the signal cables with
the power cables in parallel and never bind them together; both the signal cables and power cables
employ shielded cables and are well earthed; install ferrite magnetic ring (with suppressing frequency
of 30 to 1, 000MHz) at the output side of the inverter and wind it 2 to 3 cycles; install EMC output filter
in bad conditions;
2) When the equipment suffering interferences and the inverter use the same power supply, it may
cause conduction interference. If the above methods cannot remove the interference, it shall install
EMC filter between the inverter and the power supply (refer to Section for the prototyping operation);
3) The surrounding equipment is separately earthed, which can avoid the interference caused by the
leakage current of the inverter’s earth wire when common earth mode is adopted.
7.3.5 Leakage Current and Disposal
Inverter leakage current has two types: one is to ground leakage current, one is line-to-line leakage
current.
1) The factors of affecting to ground leakage current and solution:
the conducting cable and earth has distributed capacitance, the bigger the capacitance is, the bigger
the leakage current is, so by effectively shorten the distance between motor and inverter can reduce
distributed capacitance. The bigger the carrier frequency is, the bigger the leakage current is. By
reducing carrier frequency to reduce leakage current, but reducing carrier frequency will result in
motor noise increasing. Please pay attention: add electric reactor is also an effective way to solve
leakage current. The leakage current will increase as the increase of loop circuit current. So if motor
power is big, the corresponding leakage current is big.
2) The factors resulting in line-to-line leakage current and solution:
There is distributed capacitance among inverter output wirings, if the passing current has higher
harmonic, it may result in resonance and bring leakage current. If using thermal relay might result in
wrong action. The solution is to reduce carrier frequency or add output electric reactor. In application,
it is not recommended to add thermal relay between motor and inverter, but to use inverter electronic
overcurrent protection function.
7.3.6 Notice for Power Input Side adding EMC Input Filter
● When using the filter, please follow its rated values strictly. Since the filter belongs to Classification I
electric appliances, the metal enclosure of the filter shall be large and the metal ground of the
installing cabinet shall be well earthed and have good conduction continuity. Otherwise there may be
danger of electric shock and the EMC effect may be greatly affected.
● Through the EMC test, it is found that the filter ground must be connected with the PE end of the
inverter at the same public earth. Otherwise the EMC effect may be greatly affected.
● The filter shall be installed at a place close to the input end of the power supply as much as
possible.
- 190 -
VD520 Series Inverter User Manual Fault Shooting and Solutions
Chapter 8 Fault Shooting and Solutions

8.1 Fault Alarm and Countermeasures
VD520 inverter has warning information and fault protection function. In case of abnormal fault, the
inverter error relay contactor will be in action, before user seeking for help, please do self-inspection
according to this chapter to analyze causes and find out solution. If user cannot solve problem by
himself, seeking for help or directly contact your local dealer or our company.
VD520 inverter during running process or powered on, if fault occurred, on the display of panel of
inverter will show error code. At the moment inverter already have protection effectively to the fault,
output terminal stopped output, the display panel has indicating current error with 2~5 code.
Inverter keypad displayer has showing error code when in error, the code content and corrective
action as below table.
Code Error type Possible error causes Solution
1. Acceleration time is too 1. Extend acceleration time

short 2. Self-tuning to motor parameter
2. Motor parameter is not 3. Check grid input power
correct
Acceleration 4. Select inverter with bigger power
Err.01 overcurrent 3. Grid voltage is too low class
(hardware) 4. Inverter power is too small 5. Adjust V/F curve setting, adjust
5. V/F curve inappropriate manual torque boost
6. Inverse module short 6. Inverter module or drive circuit
circuit protection damage
1. Deceleration time is too 1. Extend deceleration time

short 2. Add external energy consumption
Deceleration 2. load inertia torque is too braking unit
Err.02 overcurrent big 3. Select inverter with bigger class
(hardware) 3. Inverter power is too small power
4. Inverse module short 4. Inverse module or drive circuit
circuit protection damage
1. Check load or reduce load

1. Load with jump or
jumping
abnormal
Constant 2. Check grid input power
speed 2. Grid voltage is too low
Err.03 3. Select inverter with bigger class
overcurrent 3. Inverter power is too small
(hardware) power
4. Inverse module short
4. Inverse module or drive circuit
circuit protection
damage
1. Acceleration time is too 1. Extend acceleration time

short 2. Self-tuning to motor parameter
Acceleration 2. Motor parameter is not 3. Check grid input power
Err.04 overcurrent correct
4. Select inverter with bigger power
(software) 3. Grid voltage is too low class
4. Inverter power is too small 5. Adjust V/F curve setting, adjust
5. V/F curve inappropriate manual torque boost
- 191 -
Fault Shooting and Solutions VD520 Series Inverter User Manual
1. Deceleration time is too 1. Extend deceleration time

Deceleration short 2. Add external energy consumption
Err.05 overcurrent 2. Load inertia torque is too braking unit
(software) big 3. Selection inverter with bigger
3. Inverter power is too small class power
1. Check load or reduce load

Constant 1. Load with jump or
jumping
speed abnormal
Err.06 2. Check grid input power
overcurrent 2. Grid voltage is too low
(software) 3. Selection inverter with bigger
3. Inverter power is too small
class power
1. The inverter output

circuits exist grounding short
circuit 1. Eliminate outside faults
2. The control model is 2. Doing motor parameter
vector and has no parameter identification
Acceleration
Err.07 identification 3. Set the voltage to normal range
overvoltage
3. Low voltage 4. Cancel the sudden load
4. Whether there is a sudden 5. Selection inverter with bigger
load in running class power
5. Small frequency inverter
selection
1. High input voltage

2. In the process of
1. Set the voltage to the normal
acceleration, there is an
range
extant force to drive the
Deceleration 2. Cancel the external power or
Err.08 motor running
overvoltage installation brake resistance
3. Acceleration time is too
3. Increase the acceleration time
short
4. Installation brake unit and resistor
4. No installation brake unit
and brake resistor
1. High input voltage

2. In the process of
1. Set the voltage to the normal
deceleration, there is an
Constant range
extant force to drive the
speed 2. Cancel the external power or
Err.09 motor running
installation brake resistance
overvoltage 3. Deceleration time is too
3. Increase the deceleration time
short
4. Installation brake unit and resistor
4. No installation brake unit
and brake resistor
1. Instantaneous power
failure
2. The voltage of the inverter
1. Reset fault
input is not in the scope of
2. Adjust the voltage to normal range
the specification
3. Seeking technical support
Err.10 Undervoltage requirements
3. Bus voltage is not normal
5. Seek technical support
4. Rectifier bridge and buffer
resistance is not normal
5. Driven board abnomal
6. Control panel abnormal
- 192 -
1. Motor protection 1. Three-phase input power is not

parameters F8-01 set normal
whether appropriate 2. Drive board abnormal
Err.11 Motor overload 2. Whether the load is too 3. Lightning protection plate
large or motor stalling abnormal
3. Small frequency converter
selection 4. Main control board abnomal
1. Whether the load is too 1. Reduce the load and check the
Inverter large or motor stalling motor and mechanical conditions
Err.12
overload 2. Small frequency converter 2. Selection inverter with bigger
selection class power
1. Three-phase input power

is not normal 1. Check and eliminate the problems
2. Drive board abnormal existing in the peripheral circuit
Input side 3. Lightning protection plate
Err.13 2. Seeking technical support
phase loss abnormal 3. Seeking technical support
4. Main control board 4. Seeking technical support
abnomal
1. The lead of inverter to 1. Eliminate peripheral failure

motor is not normal
2. Inverter three-phase 2. Check the motor three-phase
Output side winding is normal and
Err.14 output imbalance when
phase loss troubleshooting
motor running
3. Driven board abnormal 3. Seeking technical support
4. Module abnormal 4. Seeking technical support
1. Environment temperature
1. Reduce the environmental
is too high
temperature
2. Air duct blockage
Module 2. Clean air duct
Err.15 3. Fan damage
overheat 3. Replace the fan
4. Module thermal
4. Replace the thermal resistance
resistance damage
5. Replace the inverter module
5. Inverter module damage
1. Through the multi-function

terminal DI input external
fault signal 1. Reset running
Err.17 External fault
2. Through the virtual IO 2. Reset running
function input external fault
signal
1. The PC work is not work

2. Communication line is not 1. Check the PC connection line
normal 2. Check the communication
3. Communication connection line
Communication
Err.18 expansion card F0-23 set is 3. Correctly set up communication
fault
not correct expansion card type
4. Communication 4. Correctly set communication
parameter Fd group is not parameters
correct
Current 1. Check the hall device

1. Replace the hall device
Err.19 detection abnormal
2. Replace the driver board
abnormal 2. Driver board abnormal
- 193 -
Fault Shooting and Solutions VD520 Series Inverter User Manual
1. The motor parameters not

set according to the
Motor nameplate 1. Correctly set motor parameters
Err.20 self-learning according to the nameplate
abnormal 2. The parameter 2. Check the inverter to motor lead
identification process
timeout
EEPROM
Err.21 write-read 1. EEPROM chip damage 1. Replace main control board
abnormal
1. Output disconnection
2. The upper limit frequency
setting is too small of A0-21 1. Rewing
setting time is too short
2. The upper limit frequency
Disconnection 3. When do not need to
Err.22 applification or A0-21 set reasonable
detection fault disconnection detection, value
A0-21 set nonzero value,
3. Set A0-21 to zero
and the actural output
frequency reaches the upper
limit frequency
PID feedback
1. PID feedback less than 1. Check the PID feedback signal or
Err.23 loss when
FA-26 set value set the FA-26 to an appropriate value
running
Motor short
1. Motor short circuit to
Err.24 circuit to 1. Replace the cable or motor
ground
ground
1. Using parameter initialization

Running time 1. Accumulative running
Err.27 function to clear the record
reached time reach to set value
information
1. Using parameter initialization

Power on time 1. Accumulative power on
Err.28 function to clear the record
reached time reach to set value
information
1. Power grid voltage

Buffer fluction range is too large, 1. Adding input reactor and other
Err.29 contactor cause the inverter measures to ensure the stability of
overheating repeatedly up and down, input voltage
buffer contactor overheating

terminal DI input the signal
User
of user-defined fault 1 1. Reset running
Err.35 self-define fault
1
function input the signal of
user-defined fault 1

terminal DI input the signal
User
of user-defined fault 2 1. Reset running
Err.36 self-define fault
2
function input the signal of
user-defined fault 2
- 194 -
1. Confirm whether the load is out of

1. The inverter running or F8-16, F8-17 parameter settings
Err.37 Offload
current is less than F8-16 are consistent with the actual
running condition
1. Whether the load is too 1. Reduce the load and check the
Rapid
large or motor stalling motor and mechanical conditions
Err.38 current-limiting
2. Small frequency converter 2. Selection inverter with bigger
timeout
selection class power
1. In the process of inverter

Switch motor running through the terminal 1. Switch motor operation after
Err.39
when running to change the current motor inverter stop
selection
Manufacturer
Err.43 self-define 1. Seeking service
fault
8.2 Common Faults and Solutions

8.2.1 No Display after Power On
Inspect whether the input power supply of inverter is the same as the inverter rated voltage or not with
multi-meter. If the power supply has problem, inspect and solve it. Inspect whether the three-phase
rectify bridge is in good condition or not. If the rectification bridge is burst out, ask for support.
Check the CHARGE light on. If the light is off, the fault is mainly in the rectify bridge or the buffer
resistor. If the light is on, the fault may be lies in the switchover power supply. Please ask for support.
8.2.2 Power Supply Air Switchover Trips off When Power On
Inspect whether the input power supply is grounded or short circuit. Please solve the problem. Inspect
whether the rectify bridge has been burnt or not. If it is damaged, ask for support.
8.2.3 Motor doesn’t Move after Inverter Run
Inspect if there is balanced three-phase output among U, V, W. If yes, then motor could be damaged,
or mechanically locked. Please solve it. If the output is unbalanced or lost, the inverter drive board or
the output module may be damaged, ask for support..
8.2.4 Inverter Displays Normally when Power On, but Switchover at the Input Side Trips when
Run
① Inspect whether the output side of inverter is short circuit. If yes, ask for support.
② Inspect whether ground fault exists. If yes, solve it.
③ If trip happens occasionally and the distance between motor and inverter is too far, it is
recommended to install output AC reactor.
④ If inverter in normal protection, after eliminating error, press STOP/RESET key to reset error, then
restart inverter.
⑤ After eliminating error, inverter power supply shut down, wait until LED display light off, then restart
inverter.
⑥ If above steps cannot get inverter back to normal usage, then take note of the error code displayed,
and inverter specification, product number, then contact the manufacturer.
- 195 -
Communication Protocol VD520 Series Inverter User Manual
Chapter 9 Communication Protocol

VD520 series inverter, providing RS-485 communication interface, using the international standard
Modbus-RTU format communication protocol for the master-slave communication. The user can
realize the centralized control by PC/PLC, controlling the host computer and so on (setting the
frequency inverter control order, the running frequency, the related function code parameter revision,
frequency inverter working condition and fault information monitoring and so on), adapts the specific
application request.
9.1 About Protocol
This Modbus serial communication protocol defines the frame content of asynchronous transmission
information and use format in the series communication and it includes master-polling (or broadcast
address) executive command, data and error checking. The response of slave is the same structure,
and it includes action confirmation, returning the data and error checking etc. If slave takes place the
error while it is receiving the information or cannot finish the action demanded by master, it will send
one fault signal to master as a response.
9.2 Application Methods
VD520 series inverter will be connected into a “Single-master Multi-slave” control net with RS485 bus.
9.3 Bus Structure
(1) Interface mode RS-485 Hardware interface.
(2) Transmission mode
There provide asynchronous series and half-duplex transmission mode. At the same time, just one
can send the data and the other only receives the data between master and slave. In the series
asynchronous communication, the data is sent out frame by frame in the form of message.
(3) Topological mode
In Single-master system, the setup range of slave address is 1 to 247. Zero refers to broadcast
communication address. The address of slave must is exclusive in the network. That is the basis to
guarantee the Modbus serial communication.
9.4 Protocol Description
VD520 series inverter communication protocol is a kind of serial master-slave communication
protocol, in the network, only one equipment (master) can build a protocol, (Named as
“Inquire/Command”). Other equipment (slave) only by providing the data response
“Inquire/Command” or doing the action according to the master’s “Inquiry/Command”. Here, master is
personnel computer (PC), industrial control machine or programmable logical controller(PLC) etc.,
and the slave refers to the VD520 series inverter or other control equipment with the same
communication protocol. Master not only visits some slave, but also sends the broadcast information
to all the slaves. For the single master “Inquiry/Command”, all of slaves will return a signal that is a
response; for the broadcast information provided by master, slave needs not feedback a response to
master machine.
9.5 Communication Frame Structure
VD520 series inverter Modbus protocol communication data format is divided into RTU (remote
terminal unit) mode.
In RTU mode, each byte has the following format:
Encoding system: 8-bit binary, each 8-bit frame field, including two hexadecimal characters,
hexadecimal 0 ~ 9, A ~ F.
Data format: start bit, 8 data bits, parity bit and stop bit. The data format is described in the following
table: In RTU mode, new frames are always started with a transmission time silence of at least 3.5
bytes. In the calculation of the transmission rate to the baud rate on the network, the transmission
time of 3.5 bytes can be easily grasped. Followed by the transmission of data fields are: slave
address, operation command code, data and CRC checksum, each field transfer bytes are
hexadecimal 0... 9, A ... F. The network device always monitors the activity of the communication bus.
- 196 -
VD520 Series Inverter User Manual Communication Protocol
When the first field (address information) is received, each network device acknowledges the byte.
With the completion of the last byte transfer, there is a similar 3.5 byte transmission time interval,
used to identify the end of this frame, after which, will start a new frame transmission.
The information of a frame must be transmitted in a continuous data stream. If there is more than 3.5
bytes of interval time before the end of the entire frame transmission, the receiving device will clear
the incomplete information and erroneously assume that the next byte is new similarly, if the interval
between the start of a new frame and the previous frame is less than 3.5 bytes, the receiving device
will consider it to be the continuation of the previous frame. Because of the frame disorder, the final
CRC Check the value is not correct, resulting in communication failure.
The standard structure of RTU frame.
Frame header START T1-T2-T3-T4 (3.5 Bits transmission time)
Communication address: 0~247(decimal)

Slave address field ADDR
(0 as broadcast address)
03H: read slave parameter

Function field CMD
06H: write slave parameter
Data field 2*N Bit data: this part is the main content of
communication, also as the core of data exchange
DATA (N-1)…DATA (0) in communication
CRC CHK low Bit

Detect value: CRC verify value (16Bit)
CRC CHK high Bit
Tail Frame END T1-T2-T3-T4 (3.5 Bits transmission time)
9.6 Command Code and Communication Data Description

9.6.1 Command code: 03H (00000011), reads N words. (There are 12 characters can be read at
the most.)
For example: the inverter slave address is 01H, memory start address is 1001H (running frequency
address), read 5Bits continuously (running frequency, bus voltage, output voltage, output current,
output power total 5 data of run parameter), the frame of structure as below:
RTU master command message
START T1-T2-T3-T4
ADDR 01H
CMD 03H
Start address high Bit 10H
Start address low Bit 01H

Data Bit high Bit 00H
Data Bit low Bit 05H
CRCCHK low Bit D0H
- 197 -
CRCCHK high Bit C9H
END T1-T2-T3-T4
RTU slave reponse information

When Fd-05=0
START T1-T2-T3-T4
ADDR 01H
CMD 03H
Number of bytes 10H
Running frequency high Bit xxH
Running frequency low Bit xxH
Bus voltage high Bit xxH
Bus voltage low Bit xxH
Output voltage high Bit xxH
Output voltage low Bit xxH
Output current high Bit xxH
Output current low Bit xxH
Output power high Bit xxH
Output power low Bit xxH
CRCCHK low Bit xxH
CRCCHK high Bit xxH
END T1-T2-T3-T4
When Fd-05=1
START T1-T2-T3-T4
ADDR 01H
CMD 03H
Number of bytes high Bit 00H
Number of bytes low Bit 10H
Running frequency low Bit xxH
Running frequency high Bit xxH
Bus voltage high Bit xxH
Bus voltage low Bit xxH
Output voltage high Bit xxH
Output voltage low Bit xxH
- 198 -
Output current high Bit xxH
Output current low Bit xxH
Output power high Bit xxH
Output power low Bit xxH
CRCCHK low Bit xxH
CRCCHK high Bit xxH
END T1-T2-T3-T4
9.6.2 Command Code: 06H (00000110), write one word
Such as: Put 1000 (2710H) (namely write-in setting frequency F0-10*100%) write to slave address
01H to the 1000H of the inverter (communication set value address). The frame structure description
as below:
RTU Master command information
START T1-T2-T3-T4
ADDR 01H
CMD 06H
Write data address high Bit 10H
Write data address low Bit 00H
Data content high Bit 27H

Data content low Bit 10H
CRCCHK low Bit 97H
CRCCHK high Bit 36H
END T1-T2-T3-T4
RTU slave response information.
START T1-T2-T3-T4
ADDR 01H
CMD 06H
Write data address high Bit 10H
Write data address low Bit 00H
Data content high Bit 27H
Data content low Bit 10H

CRCCHK low Bit 97H
CRCCHK high Bit 36H

END T1-T2-T3-T4
9.6.3 Communication Format Error Check Method
Frame error check mode includes two part verification, Bit check of byte (odd/even verify) and CRC
- 199 -
check of complete data of format.

9.6.3.1 Byte check
User can select different check mode according to requirement, can also select no-check, but it will
affect the Bit setting of every byte check.
The meaning of even check: add a Bit of even parity check before data transmission, to express the
number of “1” in the transmission data is odd or even, if the number is even, check Bit is “0”,
otherwise it is set to “1” to Keep the parity of the data unchanged.
The meaning of odd check: add a Bit of odd parity check before data transmission, to express the
number of “1” in the transmission data is odd or even, if the number is odd, check Bit is “0”, otherwise
it is set to “1”. to Keep the parity of the data unchanged.
For example, the transmitting data “11001110”, there is 5 “1” in the data, if using even parity check,
the even check Bit is “1”, if using odd parity check, the odd check Bit is “0”, when transmitting data,
the parity check Bit will be processed and put at the position of format check Bit. And the receiving
device will also do parity check, if it found the parity of the received data is not the same as pre-set,
then it decides that communication was in error.
9.6.3.2 CRC check method
Use the RTU frame format, format include format error-checking field that is based on CRC method
calculation. The CRC field checks the contents of the entire format. The CRC field has two bytes ,
containing a 16-Bit binary value. It is calculated by the transmission device to be added to the frame.
The receiving device recalculates the CRC of the received frame and compares it with the value in the
received CRC field. If the two CRC values are not equal, then the transmission has an error.
The CRC saves 0xFFFF at first, then call a process to deal with the successive 6 bytes of the format
and the value of present register. Only the 8Bit data of each byte is enabled for CRC, the starting Bit
and the end Bit and parity check Bit is all disabled.
During generation of the CRC, each 8-bit character is separate from the register contents or (XOR),
the results is shifting towards the lowest enabled Bit, the highest enabled Bit is filled with 0. LSB is
extracted to be checked, if LSB is 1, the register separate and preset values different or (XOR); if LSB
is 0, then no need. The complete process will be repeated for 8times. After completing of the last Bit
(the 8th Bit), the next 8-bit byte is separate or (XOR)from the current value of the register. The final
value of register is the CRC value of the all Bit executed of the frame.
The calculation of CRC, adopting the international standard CRC check regulation, when user is
editing CRC calculation, can relevant standard CRC algorithm to write the CRC calculation process of
truly meet the requirements.
Now provides a simple function of the CRC calculation to the user reference (C language
programming).
unsigned int crc_cal_value(unsigned char *data_value，unsigned char data_length)

{
int i;
unsigned int crc_value=0xFFFF;
while(data_length--)
{
crc_value^=*data_value++;
For(i=0;i<8;i++)
{
iF(crc_value&0x0001)
crc_value=(crc_value>>1)^0xa001;
else
crc_value=crc_value>>1;
- 200 -
}
}
return(crc_value);
}
In logic ladder, CKSM calculates CRC value according to frame content, adopting table look-up
method, this method is simple in program, quick calculating speed, but with big occupying ROM
space. Please consider carefully in application with requirement on program space.
9.6.4 Communication Data Address Definition
This part is the content of the communication, used to control the operation of the inverter, inverter
status and related parameters setting.
Read and write functional code parameter (some function code which can not be changed, only for
the use or monitoring of manufacturers) :
Function code parameter address label rules:
The rule representation of function code group number and label for the parameter address:
High byte:F0~FF (group F), A0-AF (group A), 70-7 F (group U) low byte: 00 to FF
Such as: F3-12, address represented as F30C;
Note:
FP groups: neither read the parameters, and do not change the parameters;
U group: only can read, do not change the parameters.
When some parameters in converter is in operation, do not change; some parameters of the
frequency converter in any state, cannot be changed; change function code parameters, but also pay
attention to the range, units, and related instructions of parameters.
In addition, since the EEPROM is frequently stored, the service life of the EEPROM is reduced, so
some function code under the mode of communication, do not need to store, just change the value of
RAM.
If to F group of parameters, in order to realize the function, as long as this function code address high
F into 0 can be achieved.
If for A group of parameters, in order to realize the function, the function code as long as the address
of A high into 4 can be achieved.
Corresponding function code shown by the following address:
High byte: 00~0F (group F), 40~4F (group A), 50~5F (group b)
Low byte: 00 to FF
Such as:
Function code F3-12 is not stored in the EEPROM, address for 030C;
Function code A0-05 is not stored in the EEPROM, address for 4005;
The address that can only do write RAM, can not do the action read, as invalid address when reading.
For all the parameters, can also use the command code 07H to implement this feature.
Stop/run parameters section:
Parameter Address Parmaeter Description
1000H Communiccation set value（-10000~10000）（decimal）
1001H Running frequency
1002H Bus voltage
1003H Output voltage
1004H Output current
1005H Output power
- 201 -
1006H Output torque
1007H Output speed
1008H DI input sign

1009H DO output sign
100AH AI1 voltage
100BH AI2 voltage

100CH Reserved
100DH Count value input
100EH length value input
100FH Load speed
1010H PID setting
1011H PID feedback
1012H PLC step

1013H PULSE input pulse frequency, unit 0.01kHz
1014H Feedback speed, unit 0.1Hz
1015H Surplus running time
1016H AI1voltage before correction

1017H AI2 voltage before correction
1018H Reserved
1019H Linear speed
101AH Current power on time
101BH Current running time
101CH PULSE input pulse frequency, unit 1Hz
101DH Communication set value
101EH Reserved
101FH Main frequency X display
1020H Auxiliary frequency Y display
Note:
The communication set value is a percentage of the relative value, 10000 corresponds to 100.00%
and-10000 corresponds to -100.00%.
Data on frequency dimensional, the percentage is a percentage of relative maximum frequency
(F0-10); for torque dimensional data, this percentage is F2-10, A3-10 (Torque upper limit digital
setting, corresponding to the first and second motor respectively).
Control command input to the inverter: (only write)
- 202 -
Command address Command function
0001H: Forward running
0002H: Reverse running
0003H: Forward jog
0004H: Reverse jog

2000H
0005H: Coast to stop
0006H: Decelerate to stop

0007H: Fault reset
0008H: Emergency stop
Read inverter state: (only read)
State Word Address State Function
0001H: Forward running
3000H 0002H: Reverse running
0003H: Stop
Parameters lock password check: (if return for 8888H, it indicates that the password through check)
Code Address Input content of the password
1F00H *****
Digital output terminal control: (only write)
Command Address Command Content
BIT0: DO1 output control

BIT1: DO2 output control
BIT2: RELAY1 output control
BIT3: RELAY2 output control
2001H BIT4: FMR output control (HDO)
BIT5: VDO1
BIT6: VDO2
BIT7: VDO3
BIT8: VDO4
Analog output AO1 control: (only write)
2002H 0～7FFF indicate 0％～100％
Analog output AO2 control: (only write)
Pulse output control: (only write)
- 203 -

Inverter fault description:
Inverter fault address Inverter fault information
0000H: no fault
0001H: acceleration over current (hardware)
0002H: deceleration over current (hardware)
0003H: constant over current (hardware)
0004H: acceleration over current (software)
0005H: deceleration over current (software)
0006H: constant over current (software)
0007H: acceleration over voltage
0008H: deceleration over voltage
0009H: constant over voltage
000AH: overvoltage
000BH: motor overload
000CH: inverter overload
000DH: input phase loss
000EH: output phase loss
000FH: module overheat
0010H: reserved
0011H: external fault
0012H: communication abnormal
0013H: current detection abnormal
0014H: motor debugging abnormal
0015H: read-write abnormal
8000H
0016H: disconnection detection fault
0017H: PID feedback lost when running
0018H: short-circuit to ground upon motor
0019H: reserved
001AH: reserved
001BH: running time reach
001CH: power on time reach
001DH: buffer resistance overheart
001EH: reserved
001FH: reserved
0020H: reserved
0021H: reserved
0022H: reserved
0023H: user-defined failure 1
0024H: user-defined failure 2
0025H: offload
0026H: fast current limit timeout
0027H: switch motor when running
0028H: reserved
0029H: reserved
002AH: reserved
002BH: user-defined failure
Communication fault information description date (fault code):
- 204 -
Communication fault address Fault function description
0000: no fault
0001: password erro
0002: command code erro
0003: CRC check erro
8001 0004: invalid address
0005: invalid parameter
0006: parameter change is invalid
0007: system is lock
0008: in EEPROM operation
Fd MODBUS Communication
0: 300BPS
1: 600BPS
2: 1200BPS
3: 2400BPS
4: 4800BPS
Fd-00 Baud Rate 5 ○
5: 9600BPS
6: 19200BPS
7: 38400BPS
8: 57600BPS
9: 115200BPS
This parameter is used to set data transfer rate between the PC and inverter. Note that the host
computer and the baud rate set by the inverter must be the same, otherwise, communication can not
be carried out.The higher the baud rate, the faster the communication speed.
0: No verify (8-N-2)
1: Even verify (8-E-1)
Fd-01 Data Format 0 ○
2: Odd verify (8-O-1)
3: No verify（8-N-1）
The host computer and the data format set by the inverter must be the same, otherwise,
communication can not be carried out.
0: is broadcast address
Fd-02 Local Address 1 ○
1~247: slave address
When the machine address is set to 0, namely for the broadcast address, to achieve PC broadcast
function.
The machine address is unique (except broadcast address), which is to achieve the basis of the PC
and inverter point-to-point communications.
Fd-03 Response Delay 0ms~20ms 2ms ○
Response delay: refers to the middle interval time of the inverter data reception ends to the host to
send data. If the response delay is less than the system processing time, the response delay is based
on the system processing time, if the response delay is longer than the system processing time, after
the system processing the data, to delay the wait until the response delay time to send data to the
host computer.
Communication
Fd-04 0.0 (disabled), 0.1s~60.0s 0.0s ○
Timeout Time
- 205 -
When the function code is set to 0.0 s, communication timeout time parameter is invalid.
When the function code set to valid values, if a communication and the interval time of the next
communication beyond the communication timeout time, system will be reported to the
communication failures (Err.18). Usually, it is set to invalid. If you set this parameter in a system with
continuous communication, you can monitor the communication status.
Data Transfer Format 0: Non standard MODBUS protocol

Fd-05 1 ○
Selection 1: Standard MODBUS protocol
Fd-05=1: Selects the standard Modbus protocol.

Fd-05=0: When read command, the slave returns one byte more than the standard Modbus protocol,
refer to "Communication Data Structure" of this protocol.
Communication Read 0: 0.01A

Fd-06 0 ○
Current Resolution 1: 0.1A
Used to determine the output unit of the current value when communication reads the output current.
- 206 -
Warranty Agreement
1. The warranty period of the product is 18 months from date of manufacturing. During the warranty
period, if the product fails or is damaged under the condition of normal use by following the
instructions, Vicruns will be responsible for free maintenance.
2. Within the warranty period, maintenance will be charged for the damages caused by the following
reasons:
A. Improper use or repair/modification without prior permission;
B. Fire, flood, abnormal voltage, other disasters and secondary disaster;
C. Hardware damage caused by dropping or transportation after procurement;
D. Improper operation;
E. Trouble out of the equipment (for example, external device).
3. If there is any failure or damage to the product, please correctly fill out the Product Warranty Card
in detail.
4. The maintenance fee is charged according to the latest Maintenance Price List of Vicruns.
5. The product Warranty Card is not re-issued. Please keep the card and present it to the
maintenance personnel when asking for maintenance.
6. If there is any problem during the service, contact Vicruns’s agent of Vicruns directly.
7. This agreement shall be interpreted by Hunan Vicruns Electric Technology Co., Ltd.
Vicruns Electric (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd.

25th Building, Xili Industrial Zone, Xiangguang Road, Nanshan District, Shenzhen, China
Tel: +86-755-26638560 Fax: +86-755-26639560
Hunan Vicruns Electric Technology Co., Ltd.
No.36, Shuangma No.6 Road, High-tech Zone, Xiangtan, Hunan, China
Tel: +86-731-555573999 Fax: +86-731-58551956
Email: oversea@vicruns.com
Product Warranty Card
Address:
Customer Contact Person:

Company Name:
Information
Postcode: Tel of Email:
Product Model:
Product
Serial No:
Information
Name of supplier who supplied you the unit:
Failure
Description
(eg. Fault code)
Maintenance Personnel:

Vicruns VD520 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vicruns VD520 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vicruns VD520 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Thank you for purchasing VD520 Series Inverters!

Chapter 1 Safety and Precautions

1.2 Safety Precautions

● Handle the equipment with care during transportation to prevent damage.

● Check that the following requirements are met:

1.2.6 During Operation

1.3 General Precautions

1.3.5 Regarding Motor Heating and Noise

damage or performance reduce.

Chapter 2 Product Information

Fig 2.1-1 Designation Rules

Fig 2.2-1 Namepate

2.3 Inverter Series

Rated Rated Adaptable Motor

Single-phase Power supply: 220V, 50/60Hz

VD520-2S-1.5GB 3.0 14.0 7.0 1.5 2

VD520-2S-2.2GB 4.0 23.0 9.6 2.2 3

VD520-2S-5.5GB 8.9 50.0 25.0 5.5 7.5

Three-phase Power supply:380V, 50/60Hz

VD520-4T-0.7GB 1.5 3.4 2.5 0.75 1

VD520-4T-1.5GB 3.0 5.0 3.8 1.5 2

VD520-4T-2.2GB 4.0 5.8 5.1 2.2 3

VD520-4T-3.7GB 5.9 10.5 9.0 3.7 5

VD520-4T-5.5GB VD520-4T-5.5PB 8.9 14.6 13.0 5.5 7.5

VD520-4T-7.5GB VD520-4T-7.5PB 11.0 20.5 17.0 7.5 10

VD520-4T-11GB VD520-4T-11PB 17.0 26.0 25.0 11.0 15

VD520-4T-18.5G VD520-4T-18.5PB 24.0 38.5 37.0 18.5 25

VD520-4T-22G VD520-4T-22P 30.0 46.5 45.0 22 30

VD520-4T-30G VD520-4T-30P 40.0 62.0 60.0 30 40

VD520-4T-37G VD520-4T-37P 50.0 76.0 75.0 37 50

VD520-4T-45G VD520-4T-45P 60.0 92.0 91.0 45 60

VD520-4T-55G VD520-4T-55P 72.0 113.0 112.0 55 70

VD520-4T-75G VD520-4T-75P 100.0 157.0 150.0 75 100

VD520-4T-90G VD520-4T-90P 116.0 180.0 176.0 90 110

VD520-4T-110G VD520-4T-110P 138.0 214.0 210.0 110 150

VD520-4T-132G VD520-4T-132P 167.0 256.0 253.0 132 175

VD520-4T-160G VD520-4T-160P 200.0 307.0 304.0 160 210

VD520-4T-185G VD520-4T-185P 231.0 350.0 326.0 185 240

VD520-4T-200G VD520-4T-200P 250.0 385.0 377.0 200 260

VD520-4T-220G VD520-4T-220P 280.0 430.0 426.0 220 300

VD520-4T-250G VD520-4T-250P 315.0 468.0 465.0 250 350

VD520-4T-280G VD520-4T-280P 355.0 525.0 520.0 280 370

VD520-4T-315G VD520-4T-315P 396.0 590.0 585.0 315 500

VD520-4T-355G VD520-4T-355P 445.0 665.0 650.0 355 420

VD520-4T-400G VD520-4T-400P 520.0 785.0 725.0 400 530

VD520-4T-450G VD520-4T-450P 565.0 883.0 820.0 450 600

VD520-4T-500G VD520-4T-500P 630.0 890.0 860.0 500 660

VD520-4T-560P 700.0 990.0 950 560 750

2.4 Product Specifications

Grade of rated voltage is 220V or 380V: voltage continued

Rated frequency 50/60Hz, fluctuation range ±5%

Rated capacity Refer to table 2-1

Output three-phase under the rated input condition,

Highest frequency 50.00Hz~600.00Hz

Carrier frequency 0.5kHz~16.0kHz, auto-adjust carrier frequency.

Control mode Open vector, V/F control

Start torque 0.25Hz/150%( vector control)

Motor type asynchronous motor